OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge Optical Transport Platform V100R001
Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Issue
02
Date
2010-09-30
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
[email protected]
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Contents
Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................1 1 Guide to This Document..........................................................................................................1-1 2 List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment...................2-1 3 Preparations.................................................................................................................................3-1 3.1 Preparing Documents......................................................................................................................................3-2 3.2 Preparing Tools, Meters, and Materials..........................................................................................................3-3
4 Commissioning Optical Power................................................................................................4-1 4.1 Commissioning a System Without Optical Amplifiers...................................................................................4-2 4.2 Commissioning a System with Optical Amplifiers.........................................................................................4-4 4.3 Checking the Optical Power Commissioning Results.....................................................................................4-7
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network...................................................................5-1 5.1 Searching for and Creating NEs......................................................................................................................5-4 5.2 Creating Optical NEs......................................................................................................................................5-7 5.3 Changing the ID and Name of an NE.............................................................................................................5-8 5.4 Changing the IP Address of an NE...............................................................................................................5-12 5.5 Configuring Ethernet Extended ECC............................................................................................................5-14 5.6 Configuring IP over DCC.............................................................................................................................5-18 5.7 Configuring Board Parameters......................................................................................................................5-20 5.7.1 Configuring the LDGF Board..............................................................................................................5-21 5.7.2 Configuring the LDGF2 Board............................................................................................................5-24 5.7.3 Configuring the LOE Board.................................................................................................................5-27 5.7.4 Configuring the LOEL Board..............................................................................................................5-30 5.7.5 Configuring the LOEU Board..............................................................................................................5-32 5.7.6 Configuring the LQG Board................................................................................................................5-34 5.7.7 Configuring the LQM Board................................................................................................................5-37 5.7.8 Configuring the LQM2 Board..............................................................................................................5-44 5.7.9 Configuring the LSPL or LSPU Board................................................................................................5-54 5.7.10 Configuring the LSPR Board.............................................................................................................5-56 5.7.11 Configuring the LSX Board...............................................................................................................5-58 5.7.12 Configuring the LWX2 Board............................................................................................................5-61 5.7.13 Configuring the SCC Board...............................................................................................................5-65 Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
Contents
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5.8 Creating Fibers..............................................................................................................................................5-66 5.9 Configuring Cross-Connection Service........................................................................................................5-68 5.10 Configuring Services in Service Package Mode.........................................................................................5-70 5.11 Configuring SW SNCP Protection..............................................................................................................5-74 5.12 Configuring Port Protection........................................................................................................................5-77 5.13 Synchronizing the NE Time with the NMS Time.......................................................................................5-87 5.14 Starting NE Performance Monitoring.........................................................................................................5-89 5.15 Searching and Creating WDM Trails..........................................................................................................5-91 5.16 Checking Configurations in the Commissioning Process...........................................................................5-94 5.17 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board........................................................................................5-95 5.18 Checking Optical Power of Boards.............................................................................................................5-96 5.19 Querying Bit Errors Before and After FEC..............................................................................................5-100 5.20 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms.....................................................5-102 5.21 Testing Protection Switching....................................................................................................................5-104 5.21.1 Testing SW SNCP Switching...........................................................................................................5-104 5.21.2 Testing Port Protection Switching....................................................................................................5-107 5.22 Querying and Saving the Networkwide Optical Power and Alarm Data..................................................5-109 5.23 Backing Up NE Data to the NMS Server or Client...................................................................................5-110
A Handling Common Commissioning Problems..................................................................A-1 A.1 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LDGF Board Reports an OTU1_LOF Alarm.....................A-2 A.2 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LDGF Board Reports a LINK_ERR Alarm.......................A-3 A.3 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LWX2 Board Reports the R_LOC Alarm..........................A-4 A.4 The Receive Optical Power is Normal But an OTU Board Reports an REM_SF Alarm.............................A-4 A.5 The Optical Path Is Reachable But the NE Cannot Be Logged in Remotely................................................A-5
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration.................................B-1 B.1 Obtaining NE IP Addresses at the Site..........................................................................................................B-3 B.2 Creating a Single NE.....................................................................................................................................B-4 B.3 Checking the NE Software Version...............................................................................................................B-5 B.4 Creating an NE User......................................................................................................................................B-6 B.5 Switching a Logged-In NE User....................................................................................................................B-7 B.6 Modifying the Optical NE Name...................................................................................................................B-7 B.7 Modifying GNE Parameters..........................................................................................................................B-8 B.8 Changing the GNE for NEs...........................................................................................................................B-8 B.9 Deleting an NE...............................................................................................................................................B-9 B.10 Enabling the Proxy ARP............................................................................................................................B-10 B.11 Configuring Static Routing........................................................................................................................B-10 B.12 Querying the OSPF Protocol Status...........................................................................................................B-11 B.13 Configuring the NE Data...........................................................................................................................B-11 B.13.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually..................................................................................................B-11 B.13.2 Uploading the NE Data.....................................................................................................................B-12 B.14 Configuring Boards....................................................................................................................................B-13 B.14.1 Adding Boards..................................................................................................................................B-13 ii
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Contents
B.14.2 Deleting Boards................................................................................................................................B-13 B.15 Performance Management.........................................................................................................................B-14 B.15.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold........................................................................................B-14 B.15.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a Board..................................................................B-15 B.15.3 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE....................................................................B-15 B.15.4 Resetting Board Performance Registers...........................................................................................B-15 B.16 Modifying the Services Configuration.......................................................................................................B-16 B.16.1 Deleting Cross-Connection Service..................................................................................................B-16 B.16.2 Converting an SNCP Service to a Non-Protection Service..............................................................B-17 B.17 Switching the Working Mode of the LQM2..............................................................................................B-17 B.18 Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data....................................................................................................B-19 B.18.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods.............................................................B-20 B.18.2 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC Board.............................................................................B-21 B.18.3 Restoring Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client....................................................B-22 B.19 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode..................................................................................................B-23 B.20 Configuring Services by Creating WDM Trails........................................................................................B-24
C Service Configuration Examples...........................................................................................C-1 C.1 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the GE Service...................................................................... C-2 C.1.1 Configuration Networking Diagram.....................................................................................................C-2 C.1.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation.................................................................................C-3 C.1.3 Configuration Process (In the Service Package Mode)........................................................................C-4 C.1.4 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................... C-5 C.2 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SAN Services..................................................................C-7 C.2.1 Configuration Networking Diagram.....................................................................................................C-7 C.2.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation.................................................................................C-8 C.2.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................... C-9 C.3 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the OTN Service.................................................................C-11 C.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram...................................................................................................C-11 C.3.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation...............................................................................C-12 C.3.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................C-13 C.4 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SDH Services................................................................C-14 C.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram...................................................................................................C-14 C.4.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation...............................................................................C-15 C.4.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................C-16 C.5 Configuring the Hybrid Transmission of the GE/STM-1 Services in the Service Package Mode..............C-18 C.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram...................................................................................................C-18 C.5.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation...............................................................................C-19 C.5.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................C-20
D Parameter Reference............................................................................................................... D-1 D.1 Attributes of NEs...........................................................................................................................................D-2 D.2 Attributes of NE Users..................................................................................................................................D-2 D.3 NE Time Synchronization.............................................................................................................................D-5 Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
Contents
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
D.4 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration........................................................................................................D-8 D.5 Port Protection Parameters............................................................................................................................D-9 D.6 SNCP Service Control Parameters..............................................................................................................D-12
E Using the Commissioning Tool of the Access WDM OTN for Deployment On Site ..........................................................................................................................................................E-1 E.1 Connecting the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool...............................................................................E-2 E.2 Logging in to the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool...........................................................................E-3 E.3 Checking the Self-Check Report of the Equipment.......................................................................................E-4 E.4 Setting NE Attributes.....................................................................................................................................E-5 E.5 Checking and Adjusting the Optical Power...................................................................................................E-6 E.6 Configuring ECC............................................................................................................................................E-7
F Glossary.......................................................................................................................................F-1 G Acronyms and Abbreviations...............................................................................................G-1
iv
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Figures
Figures Figure 4-1 Example of a system without OAs.....................................................................................................4-3 Figure 4-2 Example of a system with OAs..........................................................................................................4-6 Figure 5-1 NE connections at a station..............................................................................................................5-15 Figure A-1 LDGF board networking mode.........................................................................................................A-2 Figure A-2 Schematic diagram of the OTU board reporting the REM_SF alarm..............................................A-5 Figure A-3 Schematic diagram of the network of the LDGF2 board..................................................................A-6 Figure C-1 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service......................................................................C-2 Figure C-2 Unidirectional service on each NE....................................................................................................C-3 Figure C-3 Wavelength allocation diagram.........................................................................................................C-3 Figure C-4 Configuration networking diagram of the SAN service...................................................................C-8 Figure C-5 Unidirectional service on each NE....................................................................................................C-8 Figure C-6 Wavelength allocation diagram.........................................................................................................C-9 Figure C-7 Configuration networking diagram of the OTN service.................................................................C-11 Figure C-8 Unidirectional service on each NE..................................................................................................C-12 Figure C-9 Wavelength allocation diagram.......................................................................................................C-12 Figure C-10 Configuration networking diagram of the SDH service...............................................................C-15 Figure C-11 Unidirectional service on each NE................................................................................................C-15 Figure C-12 Wavelength allocation diagram.....................................................................................................C-16 Figure C-13 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service and STM-1 service..................................C-18 Figure C-14 Unidirectional service on each NE................................................................................................C-19 Figure C-15 Wavelength allocation diagram.....................................................................................................C-19
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Tables
Tables Table 2-1 List of tasks for the commissioning and configuration of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment during deployment............................................................................................................................................................2-1 Table 5-1 ECC setting plan................................................................................................................................5-15 Table 5-2 Number of timeslots required by common services...........................................................................5-38 Table 5-3 Number of timeslots required by GE services...................................................................................5-39 Table 5-4 Number of timeslots required by common services...........................................................................5-45 Table 5-5 Number of timeslots required by GE services...................................................................................5-46 Table 5-6 Service rates of common service types..............................................................................................5-62 Table 5-7 Service configurations for the LQM board in service package mode................................................5-71 Table 5-8 Service configurations for the LQM2 board in service package mode..............................................5-71 Table 5-9 Service configurations for the LWX2 board in service package mode..............................................5-72 Table 5-10 Requirements for setting key parameters of SW SNCP protection.................................................5-75 Table 5-11 Differences between different port protection types........................................................................5-78 Table 5-12 Requirements for setting parameters of different protection types..................................................5-80 Table 5-13 Configuration checklist....................................................................................................................5-94 Table B-1 Backup and restoration methods and application scenarios.............................................................B-20 Table D-1 NE user parameters............................................................................................................................D-2 Table D-2 Descriptions of the WDM service parameters....................................................................................D-8 Table D-3 Protection Group Parameters..............................................................................................................D-9 Table D-4 Channel Status Parameters...............................................................................................................D-11
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
About This Document
About This Document Related Versions The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name
Version
OptiX OSN 1800
V100R001
OptiX iManager T2000
V200R007C03
OptiX iManager T2000 Web LCT
V200R007C03
Intended Audience The intended audiences of this document are: l
Installation and Commissioning Engineer
l
Data Configuration Engineer
Symbol Conventions The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows: Symbol
Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
About This Document
Symbol
Description Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save you time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
GUI Conventions Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update History Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Issue 02 (2010-09-30) Based on Product Version V100R001 The updated contents are as follows: l
The section "Configuring PRBS Test" is deleted and the corresponding contents are added in the section "PRBS Error Detection Function" in Feature Description.
l
Some bugs are fixed.
Updates in Issue 01 (2010-06-30) Based on Product Version V100R001 Initial commercial release.
2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Guide to This Document
1
Guide to This Document
This document helps you commission and configure the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment easily and effectively. Organized according to the tasks involved in the commissioning and configuration of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment, this document guides you to complete the commissioning and configuration of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment. Before reading this document, you are advised to master the following knowledge: l
Basic knowledge of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment Read the OptiX OSN 1800 product manuals, such as Product Description, Hardware Description, and Feature Description.
l
Basic knowledge of installing and operating the OptiX iManager T2000 and OptiX iManager T2000 Web LCT Read manuals, such as Installation Guide and Operation Guide for the OptiX iManager T2000 and Web LCT User Guide for the OptiX iManager T2000 Web LCT.
After mastering the preceding knowledge, read this document as follows: 1.
See 2 List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment to have a general idea of the tasks involved in the commissioning and configuration of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment and sequence of the tasks. Generally, you do not need to perform all tasks listed in 2 List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for a network. Instead, you can perform the necessary tasks according to the actual network configuration and networking planning and design. If you are experienced in commissioning and configuring the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment, have mastered the commissioning and configuration knowledge, and can use the commissioning tools skillfully, you can take this document as reference.
2.
To understand the specific operations and precautions of a task listed in 2 List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment, you can click the matching link of the task to access the page that describes the details about the task. The operation methods of how a task is performed by using multiple commissioning tools are provided. In an actual project, only one commissioning tool is used. Therefore, you can perform the task according to the relevant description of the commissioning tool. The operation methods of different commissioning tools are similar. They serve reference for each other in actual commissioning. Certain tasks can be performed in various methods on
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-1
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Guide to This Document
a commissioning tool. This document describes only the most common method. For other operation methods, see Reference Information of the tasks. When a task is complete, see 2 List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the next one. 3.
If you need to know more about a task, for example, optional operation methods of the task, see Reference Information of the task. Reference Information describes the handling process of common problems, relevant operations, examples, and parameter description associated with the task. NOTE
You can also find the contents in Reference Information in the appendix of this document. Nevertheless, you are recommended to read the contents from Reference Information of each task. This helps you to better understand the relationships between operations.
1-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
2
2 List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment
List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment
Complete the deployment of an OptiX OSN 1800 network according to the tasks listed in this section. Perform the tasks in sequence; otherwise, NEs may be unreachable and you may need to handle problems on site. You can perform the commissioning and configuration during deployment of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment by using either the OptiX iManager T2000 (hereinafter referred to as T2000) or the OptiX iManager T2000 Web LCT (hereinafter referred to as Web LCT). All the operations that can be performed on the Web LCT can be performed on the T2000. Compared with the T2000, the Web LCT has lower requirements on the computer hardware and can be started quickly. In actual commissioning, you can omit the tasks that are supported by only the T2000 when performing the commissioning and configuration on the Web LCT. After performing the commissioning and configuration on the Web LCT, you can configure the network-level functions on the T2000. Table 2-1 lists the tasks for the commissioning and configuration of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment during deployment. Table 2-1 List of tasks for the commissioning and configuration of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment during deployment
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
No.
Task
Mandato ry/ Optional
Tool
1
Prepare the reference documents for the commissioning. The reference documents include the engineering design documents, and blank station bar code labels.
Mandatory
Template and designing tools
2
Prepare tools, meters, and materials required for the commissioning. Download and install the Web LCT or T2000.
Mandatory
None
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-1
2 List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment
No.
Task
Mandato ry/ Optional
Tool
3
Complete commissioning the optical power. Then Mandatory reclaim and keep properly the station bar code return table.
None
4
Connect NEs to the Web LCT or T2000. Start and log in to the Web LCT or T2000. Then, search and create the NEs on the Web LCT or T2000.
Mandatory
Web LCT or T2000
5
Create optical NEs on the T2000.
Mandatory on the T2000
T2000
6
Query the SCC electronic label of an NE. Then find the NE in the station bar code return table according to the queried bar code to determine the location of the NE. Then change the ID and name of the NE according to the NE ID planning provided by the customer.
Mandatory
Web LCT or T2000
7
Change the IP address of an NE according to the IP address planning provided by the customer.
Mandatory for gateway NEs and optional for other NEs
Web LCT or T2000
8
When the network adopts HWECC communication, configure Ethernet extended ECC.
Mandatory Web LCT or when the T2000 number of NEs that adopt ECC extended communic ation exceeds nine and optional for other situations
When the network adopts IP over DCC communication, configure IP over DCC.
Optional
Web LCT or T2000
Configure the parameters of the LWX2, LDGF, LDGF2, LQM, LQM2, LQG, LOE, LOEL, LOEU, LSPL/LSPU, LSPR, LSX, and SCC boards.
Mandatory
Web LCT or T2000
9
2-2
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
2 List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment
No.
Task
Mandato ry/ Optional
Tool
10
Create optical fibers in either graphic mode or list mode on the T2000.
Mandatory on the T2000
T2000
11
Configure services.
Mandatory according to the network design and actual board configurati on
Web LCT or T2000
l In the case of the LQM2 or LQG board, configure cross-connections for each NE. l In the case of the LWX2, LQM2, or LQM board, you can use the service package mode to quickly configure services.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
12
In the case of the LQM2 or LQG board, configure SW SNCP protection.
Mandatory according to the network design and actual board configurati on
Web LCT or T2000
13
Configure port protection, including intra-board 1 +1 protection, optical line protection, client-side 1 +1 protection, and inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel protection.
Mandatory according to the network design
Web LCT or T2000
14
Synchronize the NE time with the NMS time.
Mandatory
Web LCT or T2000
15
Enable the NE performance monitoring.
Mandatory
Web LCT or T2000
16
Search and create WDM trails.
Mandatory on the T2000
T2000
17
Check the configuration to ensure that the network configuration is correct.
Mandatory
Web LCT or T2000
18
Back up the NE database to the SCC board.
Mandatory on the T2000
T2000
19
Query the optical power. Check and ensure that the optical power is normal.
Mandatory
Web LCT or T2000
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-3
2 List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment
2-4
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
No.
Task
Mandato ry/ Optional
Tool
20
Query the bit errors. Ensure that the bit errors before and after FEC are normal.
Mandatory
Web LCT or T2000
21
Query the current alarms of an NE. Analyze and remove abnormal alarms.
Mandatory
Web LCT or T2000
22
Issue manual switching commands to test the port protection switching and SW SNCP protection.
Mandatory when the port protection or SW SNCP protection is configured
Web LCT or T2000
23
Query and save the networkwide optical power and alarm data.
Mandatory
T2000
24
Back up the equipment data to the NMS server or client.
Mandatory
T2000
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
3 Preparations
3
Preparations
About This Chapter Before the deployment, collect the network data and understand the network design and configuration. In the process of installing the equipment, guide the hardware installation engineers to connect fibers and install optical attenuators as required. Before the commissioning and configuration, prepare the commissioning tools and reference documents for the commissioning. 3.1 Preparing Documents For a deployment of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment, you need to prepare documents, including station bar code return table, engineering design documents, and product manuals, according to the actual project. 3.2 Preparing Tools, Meters, and Materials You are recommended to use the Web LCT for the commissioning and configuration of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment. The version of the commissioning tool must match the equipment version.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-1
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
3 Preparations
3.1 Preparing Documents For a deployment of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment, you need to prepare documents, including station bar code return table, engineering design documents, and product manuals, according to the actual project.
Station Bar Code Return Table The station bar code return table is used to collect the bar codes of the sets of equipment installed at a station. After all sets of equipment at a station are installed, you need to record the bar codes of the equipment in the station bar code return table. The station bar code return table shows the mapping relationships between bar codes and station names. Therefore, it must be kept properly for future identifying the station where an NE is located when the ID and name of the NE are changed according to the customer planning.
Engineering Design Documents The engineering design documents are important inputs for equipment commissioning. Generally, the following contents are covered: l
Network diagrams: describe the module types, number of add and drop wavelengths, NE types and quantity, and NE IDs of each station, distance between adjacent stations, line attenuation between stations, and network topology.
l
Amplifier configuration diagrams: describe the amplifier configuration and line attenuation at each station.
l
Wavelength allocation diagrams: describe the wavelength numbers at each station, service relationships between stations (add, drop, or pass-through), and wavelength protection relationships.
l
Fiber connection diagrams: describe the internal and external fiber connection relationships, and slots, optical interfaces on the chassis and ODF terminals at each station.
Product Manuals The product manuals of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment cover the equipment functions, features, and guides to the installation, commissioning, configuration, maintenance, and troubleshooting of the equipment. In the equipment deployment phase, you are recommended to read this manual, that is, OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge Optical Transport Platform Commissioning and Configuration Guide. The reference manuals are as follows:
3-2
l
OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-service Edge Transport Platform Product Description
l
OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-service Edge Transport Platform Hardware Description
l
OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-service Edge Transport Platform Quick Installation and Commissioning Guide
l
OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-service Edge Transport Platform Feature Description Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
3 Preparations
l
OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-Service Edge Optical Transport Platform Alarms and Performance Events Reference
l
OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-service Edge Transport Platform Troubleshooting
l
OptiX OSN 1800 Compact Multi-service Edge Transport Platform Parts Replacement
You can log in to the Web site http://support.huawei.com to download the product manuals of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment. The path is Documentation > Optical Network > Optical Network Product Line > WDM > OptiX OSN 1800.
3.2 Preparing Tools, Meters, and Materials You are recommended to use the Web LCT for the commissioning and configuration of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment. The version of the commissioning tool must match the equipment version.
Commissioning Tool You can use either the T2000 or the Web LCT for the commissioning and configuration of the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment. Compared with the T2000, the Web LCT has lower requirements on the computer hardware and can be started quickly. Therefore, the Web LCT is recommended at the commissioning and configuration phases. The Web LCT, however, does not support query or configuration of network-level functions. Therefore, the query and configuration of network-level functions must be performed on the T2000. You can log in to the Web site http://support.huawei.com to download the required version of the T2000 and Web LCT. The path is Software Center > Version Software > Optical Network Product Line > Optical Network Management System. NOTE
The versions of the T2000 and Web LCT must match the version of the equipment. For the matching product versions of this document, see About This Document. NOTE
When you use the T2000 for the commissioning and configuration, you must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
Commissioning Meters An optical power meter and an optical spectrum analyzer are mainly used for optical power commissioning. The optical spectrum analyzer may be used only for commissioning of a network that is configured with optical amplifier (OA) boards. The optical power meter can be used for testing the total optical power of multiplexed signals and optical power of the optical transponder unit (OTU) boards. The optical spectrum analyzer can be used for testing the optical power, optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR), and center wavelength of a single wavelength of the multiplexed signals. You are required to test the optical power of a single wavelength of the multiplexed signals by using the optical spectrum analyzer because the test result is more accurate and the impact of the noise does not need to be considered. The meters must be calibrated before being used. Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-3
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
3 Preparations
Commissioning Materials The following materials may be used for optical power commissioning: fiber jumpers (FC/PCFC/PC, LC/PC-LC/PC, and LC/PC-FC/PC; two for each type), FOAs (3 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB), flanges, fiber cleaning tissues or fiber cleaning boxes, and compressed gas duster.
3-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
4
4 Commissioning Optical Power
Commissioning Optical Power
About This Chapter The optical power must be first commissioned in the deployment commissioning to ensure normal communication between all NEs and normal optical power received by each board. If the actual line attenuation is consistent with the design attenuation, the optical power is supposed to be within the normal range after the hardware installation engineers install the FOAs correctly according to the engineering design documents. 4.1 Commissioning a System Without Optical Amplifiers When commissioning a system without optical amplifiers (OAs), pay attention to the receive optical power of OTU boards. 4.2 Commissioning a System with Optical Amplifiers When commissioning the optical power of a system with optical amplifiers (OAs), pay attention to the output optical power of OAs, the receive optical power of corresponding OTU boards, and the input optical power of the DCM module. 4.3 Checking the Optical Power Commissioning Results When optical power commissioning is complete, you need to check the optical power commissioning results.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-1
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
4 Commissioning Optical Power
4.1 Commissioning a System Without Optical Amplifiers When commissioning a system without optical amplifiers (OAs), pay attention to the receive optical power of OTU boards.
General Requirements The general requirements for commissioning the optical power of a system without OAs are as follows: l
The optical power after commissioning must be within the permitted range.
l
A certain optical power margin must be reserved to ensure that optical power fluctuation in a certain range does not affect the existing services.
Requirements on OTU Optical Power The output optical power of an OTU board must conform to the optical power specifications of the OTU board. For details on the optical power specifications of the OTU board, see the Hardware Description. After commissioning, the receive optical power of the OTU board must satisfy the following formula: Lower threshold of the receive optical power ≤ Receive optical power of the OTU board ≤ Upper threshold of the receive optical power. It is recommended that the receive optical power of an OTU board after commissioning is equal to the average value of the upper and lower thresholds in practical application. The optical power on the WDM side of the OTU board must satisfy the following formulas: l
Lower threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver sensitivity + 3 dB
l
Upper threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver overload point - 5 dB
The optical power on the client side of the OTU board must satisfy the following formulas: l
Lower threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver sensitivity + 2 dB
l
Upper threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver overload point - 2 dB
General Commissioning Methods In general, commission a system without OAs along the signal flow, that is, from the upstream direction to the downstream direction, according to the requirements on the OTU optical power. Measure the receive and transmit optical power of an OTU board by using an optical power meter, or query the receive and transmit optical power of the OTU board on the Web LCT or T2000.
4-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
4 Commissioning Optical Power
CAUTION In the commissioning process, ensure that the input optical power of an OTU board (either the WDM or client side) is lower than the optical power at the overload point to prevent the receiver optical module from being damaged or prevent the existing services from being affected. Exercise caution especially when an APD receiver optical module is used because the overload point of such an optical module is only -9 dBm. Hence, connect a fiber loosely or do not connect a fiber to the input optical interface on the OTU board before measuring the actual input optical power.
Figure 4-1 Example of a system without OAs A O O T T U U B A
OTU
A
OTU
M U X
D U X
M U X
D U X
B
OTU
B
OTU
If the receive optical power on the WDM side of the OTU (recorded as P1) fails to meet the optical power requirement, do as follows: l
If P1 is higher than the upper threshold of the receive optical power, attach an appropriate fixed optical attenuator to the receive optical interface (point B in Figure 4-1) on the WDM side of the OTU board to ensure that P1 meets the optical power requirement.
l
If P1 is lower than the lower threshold of the receive optical power, substitute a fixed optical attenuator with lower attenuation for the existing fixed optical attenuator or remove the fixed optical attenuator attached to the receive optical interface (point B in Figure 4-1) on the WDM side of the OTU board. If P1 still fails to meet the optical power requirement after the fixed optical attenuator is removed, check whether the fiber attenuation on the line is proper and whether the network design data is correct.
If the receive optical power on the client side of the OTU (recorded as P2) fails to meet the optical power requirement, do as follows: l
If P2 is higher than the upper threshold of the receive optical power, attach an appropriate fixed optical attenuator to the receive optical interface (point A in Figure 4-1) on the client side of the OTU board to ensure that P2 meets the optical power requirement.
l
If P2 is lower than the lower threshold of the receive optical power, substitute a fixed optical attenuator with lower attenuation for the existing fixed optical attenuator or remove the fixed optical attenuator attached to the receive optical interface (point A in Figure 4-1) on the client side of the OTU board. If P2 still fails to meet the optical power requirement after the fixed optical attenuator is removed, check whether the transmit optical power of the upstream equipment is within the permitted range, whether the fiber attenuation on the line is proper, and whether the network design data is correct.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-3
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
4 Commissioning Optical Power
If the output optical power of the OTU board fails to meet the optical power requirement on OTU boards, replace the corresponding optical module.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Optical power meter, Web LCT or T2000, fiber jumpers (two FC/PC-FC/PC, LC/PC-LC/PC, and LC/PC-FC/PC fiber jumpers), several fixed optical attenuators (3 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB), fiber adapters, fiber cleaning tissue or cassette cleaner, and compressed air cleaner.
4.2 Commissioning a System with Optical Amplifiers When commissioning the optical power of a system with optical amplifiers (OAs), pay attention to the output optical power of OAs, the receive optical power of corresponding OTU boards, and the input optical power of the DCM module.
General Requirements The general requirements for commissioning the optical power of a system with OAs are as follows: l
The optical power after commissioning must be within the permitted range.
l
A certain optical power margin must be reserved to ensure that optical power fluctuation in a certain range does not affect the existing services.
l
The optical power after commissioning must meet the requirements on system expansion.
Requirements on OTU Optical Power The output optical power of an OTU board must conform to the optical power specification of the OTU board. For details on the specifications of the OTU board, see the Hardware Description. After commissioning, the receive optical power of the OTU board must satisfy the following formula: Lower threshold of the receive optical power ≤ Receive optical power of the OTU board ≤ Upper threshold of the receive optical power. It is recommended that the receive optical power of an OTU board after commissioning is equal to the average value of the upper and lower thresholds in practical application. The optical power on the WDM side of the OTU board must satisfy the following formulas: l
Lower threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver sensitivity + 3 dB
l
Upper threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver overload point - 5 dB
The optical power on the client side of the OTU board must satisfy the following formulas: l
Lower threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver sensitivity + 2 dB
l
Upper threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver overload point - 2 dB
Requirements on OA Optical Power The average output optical power of the wavelengths of an OA must be equal to the nominal output optical power for a single wavelength. In this case, the following requirements must be met: 4-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
4 Commissioning Optical Power
l
The average output optical power of the wavelengths of an OA is measured by connecting an optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT optical interface on the OA.
l
Nominal output optical power for a single wavelength = Maximum total optical power of the OA - 10lgN (N represents the maximum number of wavelengths permitted by the system). For example, the maximum total optical power of the OA is 17 dBm. If the system is designed as a 40-channel system, the nominal output optical power for a single wavelength is 1 dBm as calculated by using the preceding formula.
The output optical power of a single wavelength of the OA should be equal to or close to the nominal output optical power for a single wavelength.
Requirements on DCM Optical Power If a DCM module is configured in a system, the optical power of a single wavelength input to the DCM module must be equal to or lower than -3 dBm.
General Commissioning Methods In general, commission a system with OAs along the signal flow, that is, from the upstream direction to the downstream direction, according to the requirements on the OA optical power, OTU optical power, and DCM optical power. The optical power of an OTU board is commissioned in the same way regardless of in a system with OAs or a system without OAs. For the detailed methods of commissioning the optical power of an OTU board, see 4.1 Commissioning a System Without Optical Amplifiers.
CAUTION In the commissioning process, ensure that the input optical power of an OTU board (either the WDM or client side) is lower than the optical power at the overload point to prevent the receiver optical module from being damaged or prevent the existing services from being affected. Exercise caution especially when an APD receiver optical module is used because the overload point of such an optical module is only -9 dBm. Hence, do not connect a fiber or connect a fiber loosely to the input optical interface on the OTU board before measuring the actual input optical power.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-5
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
4 Commissioning Optical Power
Figure 4-2 Example of a system with OAs A O O T T U U B G
E
A A
OTU C OTU C
M U X 1
D
OA2
D U X 1
M U X 2
F
OA3
D U X 2
B
OTU
B
OTU
OA1
Connect an optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT optical interface on an OA, and then measure the output optical power of a single wavelength and the average output optical power of the wavelengths of the OA. If the output optical power of a single wavelength of the OA fails to meet the optical power requirement, adjust the optical attenuator at the WDM-side output optical interface on the upstream OTU board or adjust the optical attenuator at the input optical interface on the OA to ensure that the optical power of the OA meets the optical power requirements. See Figure 4-2. In the case of OA1, do as follows: l
If the average output optical power of wavelengths is higher than the nominal output optical power for a single wavelength, increase the attenuation of the optical attenuator at the input optical interface (point as D in Figure 4-2) on the OA to ensure that the average optical power of wavelengths is equal to the nominal output optical power for a single wavelength.
l
If the average output optical power of wavelengths is lower than the nominal output optical power for a single wavelength, decrease the attenuation of the optical attenuator at the input optical interface (point as D in Figure 4-2) on the OA to ensure that the average optical power of wavelengths is equal to the nominal output optical power for a single wavelength.
l
In the case of the output optical power of a specific wavelength, adjust the optical attenuator at the output optical interface (point C in Figure 4-2) on the corresponding OTU board to ensure that the output optical power of this wavelength from the OA is equal to or close to the nominal output optical power for a single wavelength.
In the case of OA2, adjust the optical attenuator at point E in Figure 4-2 to ensure that the average optical power of wavelengths is equal to the nominal output optical power for a single wavelength. If the average output optical power of wavelengths cannot be equal to the nominal output optical power for a single wavelength after the attenuation is adjusted to 0, remove the optical attenuator. If the optical power requirement is still not met, check whether the network design data is correct. In the case of OA3, adjust the input optical power of the MUX2 board at the upstream station, and then adjust the optical attenuator at point F in Figure 4-2 to ensure that the average output optical power of wavelengths of the OA is equal to the nominal output optical power for a single 4-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
4 Commissioning Optical Power
wavelength. The methods of commissioning the input optical power of the MUX2 board are as follows: 1.
Measure the optical power of each pass-through wavelength at the input optical interface on the MUX2 board and then calculate the average optical power of these pass-through wavelengths. In the case of a multiplexed pass-through wavelength, measure the average optical power by using an optical spectrum analyzer. In the case of a single pass-through wavelength, measure the optical power of this pass-through wavelength directly by using an optical power meter.
2.
Measure the optical power of a single add wavelength at the input optical interface on the MUX2 board and identify the add wavelength with the lowest optical power.
3.
Do as follows to adjust the optical power of corresponding wavelengths: l If the average optical power of the pass-through wavelengths is lower than the lowest optical power of the add wavelengths, adjust the optical attenuator at point G in Figure 4-2 to ensure that the optical power of each add wavelength is equal to the average optical of the pass-through wavelengths. l If the average optical power of the pass-through wavelengths is higher than the lowest optical power of the add wavelengths, install one optical attenuator on each pass-through channel between the DUX1 and MUX2 boards to ensure that the average optical power of the pass-through wavelengths is equal to the lowest optical power of the add wavelengths. In addition, adjust the attenuation of the optical attenuators at the output optical interfaces on other OTU boards used to add wavelengths. This is to ensure that the optical power of each add wavelength is equal to the lowest optical power of the add wavelengths as measured at the input optical interface on the MUX2 board. TIP
If the OPU board is configured with SFP EVOA, the attenuation value can be adjusted on the NMS.
If a DCM module is configured in the system, measure the total input optical power of the DCM module by using an optical power meter. Then, calculate and ensure that the actual input optical power of a single wavelength is equal to or lower than -3 dBm.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Optical power meter, optical spectrum analyzer, Web LCT or T2000, fiber jumpers (two FC/ PC-FC/PC, LC/PC-LC/PC, and LC/PC-FC/PC fiber jumpers), several fixed optical attenuators (3 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB), fiber adapters, fiber cleaning tissue or cassette cleaner, and compressed air cleaner.
4.3 Checking the Optical Power Commissioning Results When optical power commissioning is complete, you need to check the optical power commissioning results.
Prerequisite The optical power commissioning must be complete.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000 Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-7
4 Commissioning Optical Power
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Procedure Step 1 Check whether communication of all stations on the network is normal. For the checking methods, see 5.1 Searching for and Creating NEs. If communication of an NE is interrupted or the NE is abnormal, check whether the fiber connection is correct onsite. Step 2 Check whether alarms indicating excessively high or low optical power, or bit error threshold crossing exist on the network. For the checking and handling methods, see 5.20 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms. Step 3 Check whether before-FEC and after-FEC bit errors of the boards that support the FEC function are normal. For the checking methods, see 5.19 Querying Bit Errors Before and After FEC. Step 4 See the preceding procedure to check and ensure that all optical power values on the network are normal, and then save the networkwide optical power data. For the operation methods, see 5.22 Querying and Saving the Networkwide Optical Power and Alarm Data. ----End
4-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Commissioning and Configuring the Network
About This Chapter You can commission and configure the network after the equipment at each station on the network is powered on and the stations are interconnected with fibers. 5.1 Searching for and Creating NEs You can search for and create NEs when the NEs are connected to the NMS computer and the communication between NEs and the NMS is normal. 5.2 Creating Optical NEs On the T2000 the WDM equipment is allocated to different optical NEs for management. 5.3 Changing the ID and Name of an NE The ECC protocol uses an NE ID to uniquely identify an NE. When planning the network, you must assign a unique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routing collision is caused. In this case, certain NEs cannot be managed. 5.4 Changing the IP Address of an NE In the case of a gateway NE, change the IP address of the NE according to the customer planning. In the case of a non-gateway NE, you do not need to change its IP address. 5.5 Configuring Ethernet Extended ECC When there is no OSC or ESC communication between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of the NEs can be used to achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the OptiX OSN 1800 series NEs take the auto-extended ECC communication. When the number of NEs that use the extended ECC communication exceeds nine, you must set the extended ECC communication to specified mode. 5.6 Configuring IP over DCC When the network planning adopts the IP over DCC mode for communication, you need to configure the DCC channel and check whether the IP routes are correct in the commissioning and configuration. 5.7 Configuring Board Parameters
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-1
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Different boards implement different functions, and therefore you need to configure different parameters in the commissioning and configuration for deployment. Set parameters appropriately for each board according to the actual network. 5.8 Creating Fibers You are recommended to create fibers in graphic mode in the Main Topology or signal flow view. 5.9 Configuring Cross-Connection Service The LQG and LQM2 boards support configuration of cross-connections and the methods of configuring cross-connections on the two boards are the same. By default, a cross-connection created on the LQG and LQM2 boards is a direct cross-connection. 5.10 Configuring Services in Service Package Mode The service package module enables you to configure services on an NE in a one-click manner. This configuration method is easier and quicker. The OptiX OSN 1800 supports two types of service packages: GE service package and GE/STM-1 integrated service package. The LQM, LQM2, and LWX2 boards support the function of configuring services in service package mode. 5.11 Configuring SW SNCP Protection SW SNCP protection can be implemented by using convergence OTU boards that support crossconnections. This type of OTU boards includes the LQM2 and LQG boards. 5.12 Configuring Port Protection On the port protection user interface, you can configure intra-board 1+1 protection, optical line protection, client-side 1+1 protection, and inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel protection. Configure protection of an appropriate type according to the network design. 5.13 Synchronizing the NE Time with the NMS Time With the time synchronization function, the NE time is kept consistent with the NMS time. In this way, the NMS is able to record the correct time when alarms and abnormal events are reported by NEs. 5.14 Starting NE Performance Monitoring Enabling the performance monitoring function is a precondition for querying the performance events. If the current NE time is in the performance monitoring time range as set before, the NE monitors its performance events automatically. If the performance monitoring time range is not set or if the current NE time is not within the performance monitoring time range, the NE does not monitor its performance events. 5.15 Searching and Creating WDM Trails After configuring services on an NE, search for WDM trails on the NE so that you can manage services based on WDM trails. 5.16 Checking Configurations in the Commissioning Process Correct setting of each system parameter is the precondition for ensuring normal network operation. 5.17 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board By backing up an NE database to an SCC board, you can ensure that the NE automatically restores to the normal state in case a power failure occurs. When you back up an NE database to an SCC board, you actually back up the NE data to the flash memory of the SCC board. After a power-off reset occurs on the NE, the SCC board automatically reads the configuration data from the flash memory and applies the data to the boards on this NE. 5.18 Checking Optical Power of Boards By checking the optical power of a board, you can ensure that the transmit and receive optical power of the board is within the normal range. When commissioning the OptiX OSN 1800, you 5-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
can adjust the optical power of a board at the site by adding, replacing, or removing a fixed optical attenuator (FOA) or adjusting a variable optical attenuator (VOA) before an optical interface. 5.19 Querying Bit Errors Before and After FEC The count of bit errors before and after FEC is a key specification for measuring the system operation quality. 5.20 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms Viewing the current alarms on an NE helps you to intuitively and quickly locate an exception on the network. This helps you to identify a fault on the network. 5.21 Testing Protection Switching In the commissioning or configuration phase, you can run a manual switching command to check whether protection switching can be performed normally. 5.22 Querying and Saving the Networkwide Optical Power and Alarm Data After commissioning a network, you need to query and save the optical power and alarm data of the entire network. This type of data can help you analyze and understand the operating status of the network in future. 5.23 Backing Up NE Data to the NMS Server or Client You can manually back up the data of one or more NEs of the same type to an NMS server or client.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-3
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5.1 Searching for and Creating NEs You can search for and create NEs when the NEs are connected to the NMS computer and the communication between NEs and the NMS is normal.
Prerequisite Communication between the NMS computer and NEs must be normal. The IE proxy must be canceled.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Procedure l
Operations on the Web LCT 1.
Connect the ETH1 or ETH2&OAM optical interface on the SCC board to the NMS computer directly or through a local area network (LAN) by using a network cable.
2.
Change the IP address of the NMS computer to ensure that the IP addresses of the NMS computer and the NEs are in the same network segment. The IP address of the NMS computer must be different from the IP address used by an NE or a computer on the current LAN. Generally, set the IP address of the NMS computer to 129.9.0.N, in which N represents an integer ranging from 1 to 255 and the subnet mask to 255.255.0.0. You do no need to set the default gateway.
3.
Start the server and client of the Web LCT, and then log in to the Web LCT. The user name and password for logging in to the Web LCT are admin and T2000 respectively. NOTE
The Web LCT access of NEs is disabled by default. Therefore, you need to enable the Web LCT access of NEs on the NMS. Do as follows: Navigate to the NE Explorer of the NE that you want to configure on the T2000. Then choose Security > LCT Access Control in the Function Tree and click Access Allowed. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
4.
5-4
Select Domain. The default value is the network segment 129.9.255.255. Click NE Search to display the Search NE dialog box. Then search out all NEs with normal communication.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
5.
Select the NEs that you want to add, and then click Add NE. In the displayed dialog box, click OK.
6.
Select the NE that you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner or right-click the NE and choose NE Login. In the NE Login dialog box that is displayed, enter lct and password in the User Name and Password fields, and then click OK.
TIP
You can select multiple NEs at a time by concurrently pressing Shift. If you select the Use same user name and password to login check box, you can log in to multiple NEs at a time by entering the user name and password only in the first line. If you select the Use the user name and password that was used last time check box, you do not need to enter the use name and password and the system automatically uses the user name and password for login last time.
7.
l
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Select the NE that you have logged in and click NE Explorer in the lower right corner or right-click the NE and choose NE Explorer. In the NE Explorer, configure the NE and associated boards.
Operations on the T2000
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-5
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1.
Ensure that communication between the NMS computer and NEs is normal. Then start and log in to the T2000 server and client. The user name and password for logging in to the T2000 are admin and T2000 respectively.
2.
In the Main Menu, choose File > Search for NE.
3.
Select the search area and click Start in the lower right corner. The Search for NE dialog box is displayed. Click OK to search out all NEs with normal communication. You can also select Create device after search in the Search for NE dialog box to complete creating the NEs synchronously.
4.
Select an NE that is not created from the Search for NE list. Click Create to display the Create dialog box. Enter values in the NE User and Password fields. The default user name is root and password is password. Click OK. TIP
You can select multiple NEs that are not created and click Create to create multiple NEs at a time. TIP
Select an NE from the Search for NE list and click Change NE ID in the lower right corner to query the bar code of the NE. Then you can change the NE ID and name according to the station bar code return table and the customer's NE ID planning.
5.
On the Main Topology, double-click an optical NE with unconfigured NEs, for example, an idle optical NE. In the displayed dialog box, double-click an unconfigured NE in the left area to display the NE Configuration Wizard dialog box.
6.
Choose Upload and click Next. The OK dialog box is displayed.
7.
Click OK to start the upload. When the upload is complete, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
8.
On the Main Topology, double-click an optical NE, for example, an idle optical NE. In the displayed dialog box, right-click the selected NE and choose NE Explorer. In the NE Explorer, configure the NE and associated boards.
----End
5-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Reference Information Cate gory
Item
Description
(Opti onal) Oper ation s on the Web LCT
Obtaining the IP Address of an NE On Site
If you fail to query the IP address of an NE on the T2000 or Web LCT on site, see this section to obtain the IP address of an NE.
Creating a Single NE
If you have obtained the ID of an NE, you can create the NE manually.
Creating an NE User
The user names for logging in to an NE must be different. You can create an NE user as required.
Switching a Login NE User
You can switch a login NE user without logging out of the T2000 or Web LCT.
Configuring NE Data
You can configure the NE data in upload or manual mode.
Checking the Software Version of an NE
After the NE data is configured, you can see this section to query the software version of an NE.
Using the Commissioning Tool of the Access WDM OTN for Deployment On Site
If the T2000 or Web LCT is unavailable on site, you can directly manage an NE by connecting the NE to the commissioning tool of the access WDM OTN for deployment.
NE Attributes
Describes the parameters associated with NE attributes.
NE User Attributes
Describes the parameters associated with NE user attributes.
Para meter descr iption
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5.2 Creating Optical NEs On the T2000 the WDM equipment is allocated to different optical NEs for management.
Prerequisite The license file must support creating NEs of this type.
Tools, Meters, and Materials You can create optical NEs only on the T2000.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-7
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Procedure l
Operations on the T2000 1.
Right-click in the Main Topology and choose New > Device.
2.
In the Add Object dialog box, select the optical NE type.
3.
Click General Attributes and enter the basic attributes such as the optical NE name according to the customer planning.
4.
Click Resource Division and select an NE or a board from the idle optical NEs, and then click
.
TIP
To re-allocate the resources of an optical NE that has been created, right-click the optical NE and choose Attribute. Click the Resource Division tab, select an NE or a board from the list on the left, and then click
to allocate the NE or board to the optical NE.
5.
Click OK.
6.
In the Main Topology, click any place to create the NE icon.
----End
Reference Information Cate gory
Item
Description
(Opti onal) Oper ation s on the T200 0
Changing the Name of an Optical NE
See this section to change the name of an optical NE independently.
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5.3 Changing the ID and Name of an NE The ECC protocol uses an NE ID to uniquely identify an NE. When planning the network, you must assign a unique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routing collision is caused. In this case, certain NEs cannot be managed.
Prerequisite The NE communication must be normal. 5-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Precautions
CAUTION NE ID conflict leads to unreachable of NEs. Therefore, the ID of an NE must be unique on the network.
CAUTION If an NE is configured with the inter-subrack wavelength protection, you need to delete the protection before changing the NE ID and configure the protection again after changing the NE ID. NOTE
If the IP address of an NE is not changed before you change the NE ID, the IP address of the NE varies with the NE ID. Once the IP address of the NE is changed, the association between the NE ID and IP address is deleted automatically. TIP
If an NE is unreachable after the NE ID is changed, you can change the name of the NE only after searching for and logging in to the NE again. Therefore, you are recommended to change the NE name before changing the NE ID.
Procedure l
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Operations on the Web LCT 1.
In the Function Tree in the NE Explorer, choose Report > Board Detail Information Report. The Query dialog box is displayed to show the query progress. When the query is complete, an operation result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
2.
Obtain the bar code of the chassis from the queried information about the SCC board. The following figure shows the bar code of the chassis.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-9
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
3.
Find the bar code of the chassis in the station bar code return table to determine the position and name of the station where the login NE is located. Then determine the ID and name of the NE according to the NE ID and name planning provided by the customer.
4.
In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > NE Attribute. Enter Name of the NE according to the customer planning, and then click Apply.
NOTE
You can enter an NE name with a maximum of 64 characters consisting of letters, symbols, and numbers, excluding special characters that are not allowed on the interface, such as |, :, *, ?, ", .
5.
Click Modify NE ID. In the Modify NE ID dialog box that is displayed, enter values in the New ID and New Extended ID fields, and then click OK. A warning dialog box is displayed, click Yes. A dialog box indicating that the operation is successful is displayed, click Close to complete changing the NE ID. At this time, the NE is unreachable.
6.
Navigate to NE List and delete the unreachable NE. Search for and create NEs again. TIP
When you search for the NEs again, the NE IDs displayed on the interface are the NE IDs after change. The NE names, however, change to the new NE names automatically only after you create and log in to the NEs again. NOTE
For details about searching for and creating NEs, see 5.1 Searching for and Creating NEs.
5-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
l
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Operations on the T2000 1.
In the Main Menu, choose Report > Board Manufacture Information Report. Select the SCC board that you want to query in the Function Tree, and then click .
2.
Obtain the bar code of the chassis on the Board Manufacture Information Report tab.
3.
Find the bar code of the chassis in the station bar code return table to determine the position and name of the station where the queried NE is located. Then determine the ID and name of the NE according to the NE ID and name planning provided by the customer.
4.
In the NE Explorer, click
5.
In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > NE Attribute. Enter Name of the NE according to the customer's planning, and then click Apply. A dialog box indicating that the operation is successful is displayed. Click Close.
and select an NE.
NOTE
You can enter an NE name with a maximum of 64 characters consisting of letters, symbols, and numbers, excluding special characters that are not allowed on the interface, such as |, :, *, ?, ", .
6.
Click Modify NE ID. In the Modify NE ID dialog box that is displayed, enter values in the New ID and New Extended ID fields, and then click OK. A warning dialog box is displayed, click Yes. A dialog box indicating that the operation is successful is displayed, click Close to complete changing the NE ID.
----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-11
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Reference Information Cate gory
Item
Description
(Opti onal) Oper ation s on the Web LCT
Deleting NEs
You may need to delete an NE after the ID or IP address of the NE is changed. In this case, see this section to delete the NE.
Creating an NE User
The user names for logging in to an NE must be different. You can create an NE user as required.
Switching a Login NE User
You can switch a login NE user without logging out of the T2000 or Web LCT.
Para meter descr iption
NE Attributes
Describes the parameters associated with NE attributes.
NE User Attributes
Describes the parameters associated with NE user attributes.
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5.4 Changing the IP Address of an NE In the case of a gateway NE, change the IP address of the NE according to the customer planning. In the case of a non-gateway NE, you do not need to change its IP address.
Prerequisite The NE communication must be normal.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Precautions
CAUTION If the IP address of the NE and that of the computer where the T2000 or Web LCT server is located are in different network segments, the communication between the T2000 or Web LCT and the NE is interrupted. In this case, you need to configure the IP address of the NE and that of the computer where the T2000 or Web LCT server is located so that the two IP addresses are in the same network segment to recover the communication. Due to the restriction of the SQL database, after changing the IP address of the computer where the T2000 or Web LCT server is located, you need to close the client and server of the T2000 or Web LCT. Then restart the computer and the server and client of the T2000 or Web LCT.
5-12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Procedure l
Operations on the Web LCT 1.
In the NE List, select the NE whose IP address you want to change, and then click NE Explorer.
2.
In the Function Tree, choose Communication > Communication Parameters.
3.
Enter the IP address of the NE according to the planning, and then click Apply. The Warning dialog box is displayed twice. In the dialog, click OK.
4.
If the IP address of the NE and the IP address of the Web LCT server are in the different network segment after you change the IP address of the NE, the communication between the Web LCT and the NE is abnormal. Navigate to NE List and delete the NE whose IP address is changed and communication is abnormal. Search for and create NEs again. For details about searching for and creating NEs, see 5.1 Searching for and Creating NEs. NOTE
If the IP address of the NE and the IP address of the Web LCT server are in the same network segment after you change the IP address of the NE, the communication between the Web LCT and the NE is normal.
l
Operations on the T2000 1.
In the NE Explorer, select and NE and choose Communication > Communication Parameters in the Function Tree.
2.
Enter the IP address of the NE according to the planning, and then click Apply. In the Warning dialog box is displayed twice. In the dialog box, click OK. NOTE
You cannot log in to the NE after you change the IP address of the NE on the T2000. To log in to the NE, delete the original NE and create the NE again.
----End
Reference Information Cate gory
Item
Description
(Opti onal) Oper ation s on the T200 0
Modifying Gateway NE Parameters
In addition to the IP address, you need to modify other parameters of a gateway NE according to the network condition. In this case, see this section to modify the parameters of a gateway NE.
Changing the Affiliated Gateway NE of an NE
To adjust the DCN network structure, you may need to change the affiliated gateway NEs of certain NEs.
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task. Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-13
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5.5 Configuring Ethernet Extended ECC When there is no OSC or ESC communication between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of the NEs can be used to achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the OptiX OSN 1800 series NEs take the auto-extended ECC communication. When the number of NEs that use the extended ECC communication exceeds nine, you must set the extended ECC communication to specified mode.
Prerequisite The communication between NEs must be normal.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Background Information The extended ECC communication has the following two modes: l
Automatic mode: Extended ECC connections are established automatically. This mode is convenient but extra connections are established. Therefore, the resource utilization ratio is low and this mode is recommended to be used when the number of NEs is smaller than nine.
l
Specified mode: Extended ECC connections are established according to the specified server and client. In this mode, the connections are reliable and the bandwidth utilization ratio is high. In normal cases, use the specified mode to establish extended ECC connections. An NE cannot operate in both modes at the same time to establish extended ECC communication with another NE.
In the case of Ethernet extended ECC, a server NE can be connected to a maximum of eight client NEs and a client NE can serve as the server NE of another extended ECC group. Generally, set an NE that is not configured with the supervisory channel (ESC or OSC) as a client NE and an NE that is configured with the supervisory channel (ESC or OSC) as a server NE. You can set the ECC extended mode on site or remotely. When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, you need to set client NEs first and then server NEs under the condition that communication between NEs and the NMS is normal. When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, set an NE without the supervisory channel (ESC or OSC) first and then an NE with the supervisory channel (ESC or OSC). In the case of an NE without the supervisory channel, the NE is unreachable and communication between the NMS and the NE fails after the ECC extended mode is set remotely. The communication is restored automatically after an NE with the supervisory channel at the same station as the NE without the supervisory channel is set. For example, a station has ten NEs. The supervisory channel (ESC or OSC) is configured on NE A. Figure 5-1 shows the network topology. Table 5-1 provides the IP addresses of the NEs and the ECC setting plan. NE A is the server NE. NE I is a client NE of NE A and the server NE of NE J. 5-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Figure 5-1 NE connections at a station
DCN
A
J
B
C
D
I
H
G
E
F
NOTE
NEs at the station are cascaded by network cables.
Table 5-1 ECC setting plan NE Name
NE IP Address
Configuration on the Server
Configuration on the Client
IP Address
Port
Opposite IP Address
Port
A
132.37.49.130
0.0.0.0
1601
-
-
B
132.37.49.131
-
-
132.37.49.130
1601
C
132.37.49.132
-
-
132.37.49.130
1601
D
132.37.49.133
-
-
132.37.49.130
1601
E
132.37.49.134
-
-
132.37.49.130
1601
F
132.37.49.135
-
-
132.37.49.130
1601
G
132.37.49.136
-
-
132.37.49.130
1601
H
132.37.49.137
-
-
132.37.49.130
1601
I
132.37.49.138
0.0.0.0
1602
132.37.49.130
1601
J
132.37.49.139
-
-
132.37.49.138
1602
When setting the extended ECC communication mode at the station remotely, observe the following sequence: Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-15
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
J → I client → H, G, F, E, D, C, and B → A server → I server During the configuration, the status of the communication between the NMS and NEs changes frequently. l
After the setting on NE J is complete, the communication between the NMS and NE J fails.
l
After the setting on NE I client is complete, the communication between the NMS and NE I fails.
l
After the settings on NEs H, G, F, E, D, C, and B are complete, the communication between the NMS and NEs H, G, F, E, D, C, and B fails.
l
After the setting on NE A server is complete, the communication between the NMS and NEs B, C, D, E, F, G, H and I is restored automatically.
l
After the setting on NE I server is complete, the communication between the NMS and NE J is restored automatically.
Precautions
CAUTION When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, ensure that the configuration sequence is correct. That is, modify the ECC extended mode of opposite non-gateway NEs first and then the ECC extended mode of the gateway NE. Otherwise, the communication between the NMS and the unreachable NE cannot restore automatically. In this case, onsite resetting is required.
CAUTION Do not set the extended ECC mode for the communication between gateway NEs of subnets. In addition, you are recommended not to set a gateway NE but an NE closest to the gateway NE as a server NE.
CAUTION To ensure normal communication, the ECC extended mode of the NEs that adopt the Ethernet extended ECC communication must match. The match requirements are as follows: l If you set the ECC extended mode to automatic mode for an NE, you need to set the ECC extended mode also to automatic mode for the opposite NE. l If you set the ECC extended mode to specified mode for an NE, you need to set the ECC extended mode also to specified mode for the opposite NE. In addition, the two NEs must be of the client-server relationship. That is, if an NE serves as the server, the opposite NE must be the client. NOTE
When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, you are recommended to work out the ECC setting plan in advance to ensure that the settings are correct.
5-16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Procedure l
Operations on the Web LCT 1.
In the NE List, select an NE that is defined as a client NE in the ECC setting plan. Right-click the NE and choose NE Explorer.
2.
In the Function Tree, choose Communication > ECC Management. Click Refresh and check the current ECC mode of the NE.
3.
In the right function panel, set ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode.
4.
In the Set Client area, enter the IP address and port number of the server NE in the Opposite IP field and Port fields respectively. NOTE
l The IP address of each NE must be unique and on the same subnet. l A client NE can serve as the server NE for NEs at a lower level. In this case, the server and client ports of the NE must be different. That is, the port number that is set in the Set Client area is used for the communication between the NE and the server NE and must be different from the port number set for the server of the NE. l The port number is in the range of 1601 to 1699, for example, 1610.
5.
Click Apply in the Set Client area to complete the setting of the extended ECC on the client NE. NOTE
If the client NE is set remotely, the NE is unreachable and the communication between the NMS and NE fails. After the ECC extended mode on the server NE of the client NE is set correctly, the communication restores automatically.
6.
In the NE List, select a server NE that is defined in the ECC setting plan. Right-click the NE and choose NE Explorer. Then choose Communication > ECC Management.
7.
In the right function panel, set ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode.
8.
In the Set Server area, enter the port number that is the same as the port of the client NE in the Port field. NOTE
l The port number is used by the local NE for communication with the client NE. l The port number of the server NE must be the same as the port number of the client NE.
9. l Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Click Apply in the Set Server area to complete the setting of the extended ECC on the server NE.
Operations on the T2000 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-17
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
1.
In the status diagram of an optical NE, right-click a client NE that is defined in the ECC setting plan and choose NE Explorer. In the Function Tree, choose Communication > ECC Management.
2.
Set the client NE and server NE in turn according to the ECC plan. The procedure and precautions for the operations on the T2000 are the same as those on the Web LCT.
----End
Reference Information Cate gory
Item
Description
(Opti onal) Oper ation s on the Web LCT
Obtaining the IP Address of an NE Onsite
If you fail to query the IP address of an NE on the T2000 or Web LCT on site, see this section to obtain the IP address of an NE.
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5.6 Configuring IP over DCC When the network planning adopts the IP over DCC mode for communication, you need to configure the DCC channel and check whether the IP routes are correct in the commissioning and configuration.
Prerequisite The communication between NEs must be normal. The ID and IP address of NEs must be set.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Procedure l
5-18
Operations on the Web LCT 1.
In the NE List, select an NE on which the IP over DCC needs to be configured. Rightclick the NE and choose NE Explorer.
2.
In the Function Tree, choose Communication > DCC Management.
3.
Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab and click Create. In the displayed dialog box, set the Port, Channel Type, and Protocol Type fields. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Set the Port field to the port of a line or an external clock interface according to the actual IP over DCC network planning. Set the Channel Type field to the same as the channel type of the third-type equipment. In the case of a network that is comprised of only the OptiX OSN 1800 equipment, set the field to the default value GCC0. Set the Protocol Type field to TCP/IP. 4.
Click Apply to complete configuring the DCC channel of the NE.
5.
In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > IP Stack Protocol Management from the Function Tree. Click the IP Route Management tab. Check whether the IP routes and their parameters in the routing table are the same as planed. In normal situation, a gateway NE must have the routes to the IP addresses of all the non-gateway NEs that are managed by the gateway NE and the route to the Web LCT or T2000 server.
l
Operations on the T2000 1.
In the status diagram of an optical NE, right-click an NE on which the IP over DCC needs to be configured and choose NE Explorer. In the Function Tree, choose Communication > DCC Management.
2.
Set the NEs in turn according to the IP over DCC planning. The procedure and precautions for the operations on the T2000 are the same as those on the Web LCT.
----End
Reference Information Cate gory
Item
Description
(Opti onal) Oper ation s on the Web LCT
Enabling the Proxy ARP
You need to enable the proxy ARP function of the gateway NE of an NE before configuring the IP static route for the NE.
Configuring the IP Static Route for an NE
In addition to the requirement that the NMS accesses NEs on the entire network through the gateway NE, there is the upper layer application requirement of accessing remote NEs based on the IP network layer. To meet the requirement, you must enable the proxy ARP function of the gateway NE, and then configure a static route to the NMS on each remote NE.
Querying the OSPF Protocol Status
If certain IP routes are unavailable, contact Huawei engineers to adjust the OSPF protocol parameters used by the NEs. Ensure that the OSPF function is available to all the NEs.
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task. Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-19
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5.7 Configuring Board Parameters Different boards implement different functions, and therefore you need to configure different parameters in the commissioning and configuration for deployment. Set parameters appropriately for each board according to the actual network. The section describes only the parameter values that you need to configure in the commissioning and configuration for deployment. For the specific functions and working principles of the boards, see the Hardware Description. 5.7.1 Configuring the LDGF Board The LDGF is used to multiplex two channels of GE service signals (GE optical signal or GE electrical signal) and two channels of FE electrical signals into a channel of OTU1 signals. 5.7.2 Configuring the LDGF2 Board The LDGF2 board multiplexes two channels of 2 x GE service signals into two channels of OTU1 signals. 5.7.3 Configuring the LOE Board The LOE board is applicable to three scenarios: convergence of eight EPON services, convergence of eight GE services, and mixed transmission of EPON and GE services. 5.7.4 Configuring the LOEL Board The LOEL board interconnects with the OLT equipment to access eight EPON services. 5.7.5 Configuring the LOEU Board The LOEU board is applicable to the convergence of eight EPON or GE services. 5.7.6 Configuring the LQG Board The LQG board multiplexes four GE services to an OTU 5G or FEC 5G service. 5.7.7 Configuring the LQM Board The LQM board is applicable to two scenarios: convergence of four services at Any rate and regeneration of one channel of OTU1 optical signals. 5.7.8 Configuring the LQM2 Board When the LQM2 board works in 2LQM mode, it is applicable to the convergence of double four services at Any rate or regeneration of two OTU1 services. When the LQM2 board works in AP8 mode, it is applicable to the convergence of eight services at Any rate or regeneration of one OTU1 service. 5.7.9 Configuring the LSPL or LSPU Board The LSPL board must be used in pairs with the LSPU board. The LSPL board interconnects with the OLT equipment and the LSPU board interconnects with the ONU equipment. 5.7.10 Configuring the LSPR Board The LSPR board interconnects with the OLT equipment at the RX1/TX1 optical interfaces and with the ONU equipment at the RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to achieve the distance extension of one GPON service through the retiming, reshaping, and regeneration (3R) function in transparent transmission. 5.7.11 Configuring the LSX Board The LSX board is applicable to two scenarios: transparent transmission of one channel of 10G bit/s optical signals and regeneration of one channel of OTU2 or OTU2v optical signals. 5.7.12 Configuring the LWX2 Board 5-20
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
The LWX2 board is applicable to two scenarios: transparent transmission of two services at Any rate and regeneration of two OTU1 services. 5.7.13 Configuring the SCC Board The SCC board provides the DCC channels for the interworking and intercommunication between NEs.
5.7.1 Configuring the LDGF Board The LDGF is used to multiplex two channels of GE service signals (GE optical signal or GE electrical signal) and two channels of FE electrical signals into a channel of OTU1 signals.
Prerequisite You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows: l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. NOTE
You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.
Precautions TIP
In the case of the LDGF board, you can connect a portable computer to the FE interface by using a network cable when the FE interface is in Used state. Then issue the ping command for connecting to the opposite client equipment to check whether a normal connection can be established on the channel.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-21
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Parameter Settings Field
Value
Description
Service Type
GE, GE(GFP-T)
l Usually, GE(GFP-T) is recommended. In this mode, the transmission delay is small and all control protocol packets are transparently transmitted.
Default: GE(GFP-T)
l In other cases, set this parameter to GE according to the service encapsulation mode. l Service types of the two boards that are interconnected with each other must be consistent. Channel Use Status
Used, Unused Default: Used
l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel that is not used. l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that is used.
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
l The default value is recommended.
Default: Enabled for client-side optical interfaces, and Disabled for WDMside optical interfaces.
l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other values are invalid.
Hold-Off Time of Automatic Laser Shutdown
0s to 2s, with a step of 100 ms.
The default value is recommended.
Laser Status
Open, Close
Default: 0s
Default: l WDM side: Open l Client side: Close
l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every WDM-side optical interface. l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain the default value because Automatic Laser Shutdown is usually set to Enabled. CAUTION If the communication between NEs is achieved through only the ESC provided by the LDGF board, do not disable the WDM-side lasers on the LDGF board. Otherwise, NEs become unreachable when neither a standby channel is available nor protection is configured.
FEC Working Enabled, Disabled State Default: Enabled
5-22
l Enabled is recommended. l FEC Working State of the two interconnected OTU boards must be consistent.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface Loopback
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop
Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when a network works normally. It can be set to Inloop or Outloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or a process of removing a fault on a network. However, it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the test is complete or the fault is removed.
Default: NonLoopback
When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is set to the default value Enabled, the loopback setting is automatically cancelled after Auto Disabling Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses. SD Trigger Condition
SM_BIP8_SD, PM_BIP8_SD Default: None
This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger Flag is set to Enable. all the alarms can be set as the SD switching conditions.
Max. Packet Length
1518-9600
This parameter is valid only when Service Type is set to GE. The default value is recommended.
AutoNegotiation of GE
Enabled, Disabled
Default: 9600
Default: Disabled
The Auto Negotiation parameter is available only when the Service Type parameter is set to GE. l It is recommended to set this parameter to Disabled. l If the equipment of the customer adopts the auto negotiation, the value of the Auto Negotiation parameter must be consistent with the value of the Auto Negotiation parameter of the equipment of the customer. l The Auto Negotiation parameter must be consistent for the OTUs in the same protection group.
Intelligent Fiber Status
Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled
When a link is faulty, and the fault state must be transparently transmitted to the interconnected client-side equipment, the IF function needs to be enabled. l This parameter is valid only when Service Type of the optical port is set to GE. l This parameter is invalid after the LPT function of the board is enabled.
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled
This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to GE. l The LPT function can work only with intraboard 1+1 protection and cannot work with any other protection. l Set this parameter to Enabled when you want to enable the LPT function; otherwise, keep the default value for this parameter.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-23
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
The parameter format is as follows: band type/wavelength No./ optical interface wavelength/ frequency, for example, CWDM/ 11/1471.00/208.170.
This parameter is for query only.
Default: Band Type
C, CWDM
This parameter is for query only.
Default: / Optical Interface/ Channel
-
-
Optical Interface Name
-
-
5.7.2 Configuring the LDGF2 Board The LDGF2 board multiplexes two channels of 2 x GE service signals into two channels of OTU1 signals.
Prerequisite You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows: l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. NOTE
You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.
5-24
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Parameter Settings Field
Value
Description
Service Type
GE, GE(GFP-T)
l Usually, GE(GFP-T) is recommended. In this mode, the transmission delay is small and all control protocol packets are transparently transmitted.
Default: GE(GFP-T)
l In other cases, set this parameter to GE according to the service encapsulation mode. l Service types of the two boards that are interconnected with each other must be consistent. Channel Use Status
Used, Unused Default: Used
l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel that is not used. l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that is used.
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
l The default value is recommended.
Default: Enabled for client-side optical interfaces, and Disabled for WDMside optical interfaces.
l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other values are invalid.
Hold-Off Time of Automatic Laser Shutdown
0s to 2s, with a step of 100 ms.
The default value is recommended.
Laser Status
Open, Close
Default: 0s
Default: l WDM side: Open l Client side: Close
l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every WDM-side optical interface. l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain the default value because Automatic Laser Shutdown is usually set to Enabled. CAUTION If the communication between NEs is achieved through only the ESC provided by the LDGF2 board, do not disable the WDM-side lasers on the LDGF2 board. Otherwise, NEs become unreachable when neither a standby channel is available nor protection is configured.
FEC Working Enabled, Disabled State Default: Enabled
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
l Enabled is recommended. l FEC Working State of the two interconnected OTU boards must be consistent.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-25
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface Loopback
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop
Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when a network works normally. It can be set to Inloop or Outloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or a process of removing a fault on a network. However, it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the test is complete or the fault is removed.
Default: NonLoopback
When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is set to the default value Enabled, the loopback setting is automatically cancelled after Auto Disabling Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses. SD Trigger Condition
SM_BIP8_SD, PM_BIP8_SD Default: None
This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger Flag is set to Enable. all the alarms can be set as the SD switching conditions.
Max. Packet Length
1518-9600
This parameter is valid only when Service Type is set to GE. The default value is recommended.
AutoNegotiation of GE
Enabled, Disabled
Default: 9600
Default: Disabled
The Auto Negotiation parameter is available only when the Service Type parameter is set to GE. l It is recommended to set this parameter to Disabled. l If the equipment of the customer adopts the auto negotiation, the value of the Auto Negotiation parameter must be consistent with the value of the Auto Negotiation parameter of the equipment of the customer. l The Auto Negotiation parameter must be consistent for the OTUs in the same protection group.
Intelligent Fiber Status
Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled
When a link is faulty, and the fault state must be transparently transmitted to the interconnected client-side equipment, the IF function needs to be enabled. l This parameter is valid only when Service Type of the optical port is set to GE. l This parameter is invalid after the LPT function of the board is enabled.
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled
This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to GE. l The LPT function can work only with intraboard 1+1 protection and cannot work with any other protection. l Set this parameter to Enabled when you want to enable the LPT function; otherwise, keep the default value for this parameter.
5-26
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
The parameter format is as follows: band type/wavelength No./ optical interface wavelength/ frequency, for example, CWDM/ 11/1471.00/208.170.
This parameter is for query only.
Default: Band Type
C, CWDM
This parameter is for query only.
Default: / Optical Interface/ Channel
-
-
Optical Interface Name
-
-
5.7.3 Configuring the LOE Board The LOE board is applicable to three scenarios: convergence of eight EPON services, convergence of eight GE services, and mixed transmission of EPON and GE services.
Prerequisite You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows: l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. NOTE
You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-27
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Parameter Settings Field
Value
Description
Service Type
None, GE(GFP-T), EPON_OLT, EPON_ONU
In case of EPON services:
Default: GE(GFP-T)
l When the board is configured with an OLT optical module, set this parameter to EPON_ONU. l When the board is configured with an ONU optical module, set this parameter to EPON_OLT. NOTE When the service type changes between EPON_ONU and EPON_OLT, the service type of a channel carrying EPON services must be set to GE(GFP-T) or NONE first. For example, when the board receives four EPON services, the service type must be changed from EPON_ONU to EPON_OLT. In this case, you must set the service types of the four channels to GE(GFP-T) or None before you change the service type to EPON_OLT.
If no services are received at the board, you can set the service type to None. In this case, the board does not report electrical-layer alarms on the channel. Channel Use Status
Used, Unused Default: Used
l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel that is not used. l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that is used.
5-28
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
l The default value is recommended.
Default: Enabled for client-side optical interfaces, and Disabled for WDMside optical interfaces.
l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other values are invalid.
Hold-Off Time of Automatic Laser Shutdown
0s to 2s, with a step of 100 ms.
The default value is recommended.
Default: 0s
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
Laser Status
Open, Close
l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every WDM-side optical interface.
Default: l WDM side: Open l Client side: Close
l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain the default value because Automatic Laser Shutdown is usually set to Enabled. CAUTION If the communication between NEs is achieved through only the ESC provided by the LOE board, do not disable the WDM-side lasers on the LOE board. Otherwise, NEs become unreachable when neither a standby channel is available nor protection is configured.
FEC Working Enabled, Disabled State Default: Enabled
l Enabled is recommended.
Optical Interface Loopback
Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when a network works normally. It can be set to Inloop or Outloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or a process of removing a fault on a network. However, it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the test is complete or the fault is removed.
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback
l FEC Working State of the two interconnected OTU boards must be consistent.
When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is set to the default value Enabled, the loopback setting is automatically cancelled after Auto Disabling Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses. NOTE The parameter can be set to Inloop or Outloop only when GE Service is accessed.
SD Trigger Condition
SM_BIP8_SD, PM_BIP8_SD Default: None
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
The parameter format is as follows: band type/wavelength No./ optical interface wavelength/ frequency, for example, CWDM/ 11/1471.00/208.170.
This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger Flag is set to Enable. all the alarms can be set as the SD switching conditions. This parameter is for query only.
Default: / Band Type
C, CWDM
This parameter is for query only.
Default: / Optical Interface/ Channel
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-29
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface Name
-
-
5.7.4 Configuring the LOEL Board The LOEL board interconnects with the OLT equipment to access eight EPON services.
Prerequisite You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows: l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. NOTE
You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.
Parameter Settings Field
Value
Description
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused
l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel that is not used.
Default: Used
l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that is used. Automatic Laser Shutdown
5-30
Enabled, Disabled
l The default value is recommended.
Default: Enabled for client-side optical interfaces, and Disabled for WDMside optical interfaces.
l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other values are invalid.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
Hold-Off Time of Automatic Laser Shutdown
0s to 2s, with a step of 100 ms.
The default value is recommended.
Laser Status
Open, Close
Default: 0s
Default: l WDM side: Open l Client side: Close
l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every WDM-side optical interface. l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain the default value because Automatic Laser Shutdown is usually set to Enabled. CAUTION If the communication between NEs is achieved through only the ESC provided by the LOEL board, do not disable the WDM-side lasers on the LOEL board. Otherwise, NEs become unreachable when neither a standby channel is available nor protection is configured.
FEC Working Enabled, Disabled State Default: Enabled
l Enabled is recommended.
SD Trigger Condition
This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger Flag is set to Enable. all the alarms can be set as the SD switching conditions.
SM_BIP8_SD, PM_BIP8_SD Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled Default: /
l FEC Working State of the two interconnected OTU boards must be consistent.
l Retain the default value when a network works normally. l Set this parameter to Enabled for the auxiliary board if you need to perform a RPBS test during deployment commissioning. Set this parameter to Disabled after the test is complete.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
The parameter format is as follows: band type/wavelength No./ optical interface wavelength/ frequency, for example, CWDM/ 11/1471.00/208.170.
This parameter is for query only.
Default: Band Type
C, CWDM
This parameter is for query only.
Default: / Optical Interface/ Channel
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-31
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface Name
-
-
5.7.5 Configuring the LOEU Board The LOEU board is applicable to the convergence of eight EPON or GE services.
Prerequisite You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows: l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. NOTE
You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.
Parameter Settings Field
Value
Description
Service Type
EPON, GE(GFP_T)
Select a proper value according to the received services.
Default: GE(GFP_T) Channel Use Status
Used, Unused Default: Used
l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel that is not used. l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that is used.
5-32
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
l The default value is recommended.
Default: Enabled for client-side optical interfaces, and Disabled for WDMside optical interfaces.
l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other values are invalid.
Hold-Off Time of Automatic Laser Shutdown
0s to 2s, with a step of 100 ms.
The default value is recommended.
Laser Status
Open, Close
Default: 0s
Default: l WDM side: Open l Client side: Close
l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every WDM-side optical interface. l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain the default value because Automatic Laser Shutdown is usually set to Enabled. CAUTION If the communication between NEs is achieved through only the ESC provided by the LOEU board, do not disable the WDM-side lasers on the LOEU board. Otherwise, NEs become unreachable when neither a standby channel is available nor protection is configured.
FEC Working Enabled, Disabled State Default: Enabled
l Enabled is recommended.
SD Trigger Condition
This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger Flag is set to Enable. all the alarms can be set as the SD switching conditions.
SM_BIP8_SD, PM_BIP8_SD Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled Default: /
l FEC Working State of the two interconnected OTU boards must be consistent.
l Retain the default value when a network works normally. l Set this parameter to Enabled for the auxiliary board if you need to perform a RPBS test during deployment commissioning. Set this parameter to Disabled after the test is complete.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
The parameter format is as follows: band type/wavelength No./ optical interface wavelength/ frequency, for example, CWDM/ 11/1471.00/208.170.
This parameter is for query only.
Default: -
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-33
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
Band Type
C, CWDM
This parameter is for query only.
Default: / Optical Interface/ Channel
-
-
Optical Interface Name
-
-
5.7.6 Configuring the LQG Board The LQG board multiplexes four GE services to an OTU 5G or FEC 5G service.
Prerequisite You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows: l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. NOTE
You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.
5-34
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Parameter Settings Field
Value
Description
Service Type
GE, GE(GFP-T)
l Set this parameter to a proper value according to the service type of the interconnected board. If Service Type needs to be changed from GE to GE(GFP-T), set Port Mapping to Encapsulated to OTU5G before you change Service Type to GE(GFP-T). In case of GE (GFP-T) services, Port Mapping must be set to Encapsulated to OTU5G.
Default: GE
NOTE After you configure a cross-connection for the board, if the service type that you select when configuring the cross-connection is different from the value you set for the Service Type field, setting the Service Type field fails. In this case, you need to delete the cross-connection and set the Service Type field again.
Port Mapping
Channel Use Status
Encapsulated to FEC5G, Encapsulated to OTU5G
The default value is recommended. Different service types are supported in the two mapping modes.
Default: Encapsulated to FEC5G
l Encapsulated to OTU5G: GE and GE(GFP-T) are supported.
Used, Unused
l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel that is not used.
Default: Used
l Encapsulated to FEC5G: GE is supported.
NOTE Port Mapping of the two boards that are interconnected with each other must be consistent and Service Type of their WDM-side optical interfaces must be consistent.
l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that is used.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
l The default value is recommended.
Default: Enabled for client-side optical interfaces, and Disabled for WDMside optical interfaces.
l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other values are invalid.
Hold-Off Time of Automatic Laser Shutdown
0s to 2s, with a step of 100 ms.
The default value is recommended.
Default: 0s
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-35
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Field
Value
Description
Laser Status
Open, Close
l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every WDM-side optical interface.
Default: l WDM side: Open l Client side: Close
l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain the default value because Automatic Laser Shutdown is usually set to Enabled. CAUTION If the communication between NEs is achieved through only the ESC provided by the LQG board, do not disable the WDM-side lasers on the LQG board. Otherwise, NEs become unreachable when neither a standby channel is available nor protection is configured.
FEC Working Enabled, Disabled State Default: Enabled
l Enabled is recommended.
Optical Interface Loopback
Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when a network works normally. It can be set to Inloop or Outloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or a process of removing a fault on a network. However, it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the test is complete or the fault is removed.
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback
l FEC Working State of the two interconnected OTU boards must be consistent.
When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is set to the default value Enabled, the loopback setting is automatically cancelled after Auto Disabling Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses. Max. Packet Length
1518-9600
AutoNegotiation of GE
Enabled, Disabled
Default: 9600
Default: Disabled
This paramter is valid only when Service Type is set to GE. The default value is recommended. The Auto Negotiation parameter is available only when the Service Type parameter is set to GE. l It is recommended to set this parameter to Disabled. l If the equipment of the customer adopts the auto negotiation, the value of the Auto Negotiation parameter must be consistent with the value of the Auto Negotiation parameter of the equipment of the customer. l The Auto Negotiation parameter must be consistent for the OTUs in the same protection group.
5-36
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
Intelligent Fiber Status
Enabled, Disabled
When a link is faulty, and the fault state must be transparently transmitted to the interconnected client-side equipment, the IF function needs to be enabled.
Default: Enabled
l This parameter is valid only when Service Type of the optical port is set to GE. l This parameter is invalid after the LPT function of the board is enabled. SD Trigger Condition
SM_BIP8_SD, PM_BIP8_SD, B1_SD Default: None
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled
This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger Flag is set to Enable. all the alarms can be set as the SD switching conditions. This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to GE. l The LPT function can work only with intraboard 1+1 protection and cannot work with any other protection. l Set this parameter to Enabled when you want to enable the LPT function; otherwise, keep the default value for this parameter.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
The parameter format is as follows: band type/wavelength No./ optical interface wavelength/ frequency, for example, CWDM/ 11/1471.00/208.170.
This parameter is for query only.
Default: Band Type
C, CWDM
This parameter is for query only.
Default: / Optical Interface/ Channel
-
-
Optical Interface Name
-
-
5.7.7 Configuring the LQM Board The LQM board is applicable to two scenarios: convergence of four services at Any rate and regeneration of one channel of OTU1 optical signals. Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-37
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Prerequisite You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows: l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. NOTE
You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.
Background Information The service processing chip of the LQM board provides 16 timeslots for receiving services. Different types of services require different number of timeslots. The total number of timeslots for the services received at the LQM board must be smaller than the maximum number of timeslots that the service processing chip can provide. In addition, the total number of timeslots for the services configured at the TX1/RX1, TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, and TX4/RX4 interfaces must be not greater than 16. Table 5-2 lists the number of timeslots required by common services. Table 5-2 Number of timeslots required by common services
5-38
Service Type
Number of Timeslots Required
Service Type
Number of Timeslots Required
GE/GE(GFP_T)
7
FICON
6
STM-1
1
FICON EXPRESS
12
STM-4
4
ESCON
2
STM-16
16
DVB-ASI
2
FC200
12
HDTV
12
FC100
6
HDTV14835
12
FE
1
OTU1
16
FC100_SLICE
8
FICON_SLICE
8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Service Type
Number of Timeslots Required
Service Type
Number of Timeslots Required
FC200_SLICE
16
GE_SLICE
12
FICON_EXPRESS_ SLICE
16
-
-
In case of GE services, the committed information rate can be configured to change the number of timeslots required. Table 5-3 lists the number of timeslots required by GE services at different bandwidths. Table 5-3 Number of timeslots required by GE services Bandwidth (Mbit/ s)
Number of Timeslots Required
Bandwidth (Mbit/ s)
Number of Timeslots Required
931-1000
7
311-465
3
776-930
6
156-310
2
621-775
5
1-155
1
466-620
4
-
-
The LQM board supports slice services, such as GE_SLICE, FC100_SLICE, FC200_SLICE, FICON_SLICE, and FICON_EXPRESS_SLICE. Compared with common services, slice services feature better performance in transparent transmission of clock but require more timeslots. In practical application, select a proper service type according to the actual conditions. For example, when the LQM board is used to receive FC100 services, select FC100_SLICE if better performance in transparent transmission of clock is required and timeslots are sufficient. Otherwise, select FC100 so that more timeslots can be used to receive other types of services.
Precautions
CAUTION If you delete a logical LQM board and configure it again on the NMS, the original configuration of the board is deleted and the default configuration is restored.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-39
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Parameter Settings Field
Value
Description
Service Type
OTU-1, DVB-ASI, HDTV, ESCON, FC-100, FC-100 (slice), FC-200, FC-200 (slice), FE, FICON, FICON express, FICON express (slice), FICON (slice), GE, GE(GFP-T), GE_SLICE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, None
The requirement on the number of timeslots for service configuration is as follows: The total number of timeslots for the services configured at the TX1/RX1, TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, and TX4/RX4 interfaces must be not greater than 16.
Default: OTU-1 (in the case of the TX1/ RX1 interface) or None (in the case of the other interfaces) Channel Use Status
Used, Unused Default: Used
Rate requirements for service configuration are as follows: l When the LQM board is used for converging four services at Any rate, set Service Type according to the types of the actually received services. The TX1/RX1 optical interface support service rates in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and the other client-side optical interfaces support service rates in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s. l When the LQM board is used for regenerating OTU1 signals, set Service Type to OTU1 for the TX1/RX1 optical interface. l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel that is not used. l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that is used. For example, when the LQM board is used for regenerating OTU1 signals, set Channel Use Status to Unusedfor the TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, TX4/RX4, and IN2/OUT2 interfaces and to Used for the TX1/RX1 and IN1/OUT1 interfaces.
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Hold-Off Time of Automatic Laser Shutdown
5-40
Enabled, Disabled
l The default value is recommended.
Default: Disabled(in the case of the TX1/ RX2 interface), Enabled(in the case of other client-side optical interfaces), or Disabled(in the case of WDM-side optical interfaces)
l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other values are invalid.
0s to 2s, with a step of 100 ms.
The default value is recommended.
In practical application, set this parameter according to the scenario where the board is used. For example, when the LQM board is used for regenerating OTU1 signals, set Automatic Laser Shutdown to Disabledfor the TX1/RX1 interface and retain the default value for the TX2/RX2, TX3/ RX3, and TX4/RX4 interfaces.
Default: 0s
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
Laser Status
Open, Close
l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every WDM-side optical interface.
Default: l WDM side: Open l Client side: Close
l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain the default value because Automatic Laser Shutdown is usually set to Enabled. In practical application, set this parameter according to the scenario where the board is used. For example, when the LQM board is used for regenerating OTU1 signals, set Laser Status to ONfor the TX1/RX1 and IN1/OUT1 interface and toOFF for the TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, TX4/RX4, and IN2/OUT2 optical interfaces. CAUTION If communication between NEs is achieved through only ESC provided by the LQM board, the following situations occur when neither a standby channel is available nor protection is configured: l When the LQM board is used for converging four services at Any rate, the NE becomes unreachable after the WDM-side lasers on the LQM board are disabled. l When the LQM board is used for regenerating OTU1 signals, the NE becomes unreachable after the lasers at the TX1/RX1 and IN1/OUT1 interfaces on the LQM board are disabled.
FEC Working Enabled, Disabled State Default: Enabled
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
l Enabled is recommended. l FEC Working State of the two interconnected OTU boards must be consistent.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-41
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Field
Value
Description
Guaranteed Bandwidth for ClientSide GE Service (M)
1-1000
l Users determine the ensure bandwidth for GE services based on the needs. This parameter needs to be configured only for GE services.
Default: 1000
l The value of the Guaranteed Bandwidth for Client-Side GE Service (M) parameter must be greater than the actual service bandwidth of users. Only in this case, no packet loss can be ensured. l Retain the default value when timeslots are sufficient. l When timeslots are insufficient, decrease the committed information rate (CIR) of GE services to decrease the number of required timeslots. This is to ensure that the total number of timeslots is within the required range. For example, when the TX1/RX1, TX2/RX2, TX3/ RX3, and TX4/RX4 interfaces are used to receive GE services, the CIR can be set to 620 Mbit/s. In this case, each GE service uses four timeslots. Hence, the total number of timeslots required by the services received at the TX1/ RX1, TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, and TX4/RX4 interfaces is not greater than 16.
Optical Interface Loopback
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback
Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when a network works normally. It can be set to Inloop or Outloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or a process of removing a fault on a network. However, it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the test is complete or the fault is removed. When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is set to the default value Enabled, the loopback setting is automatically cancelled after Auto Disabling Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses.
Max. Packet Length
5-42
1518-9600 Default: 9600
This paramter is valid only when Service Type is set to GE. The default value is recommended.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
AutoNegotiation of GE
Enabled, Disabled
The Auto Negotiation parameter is available only when the Service Type parameter is set to GE.
Default: Disabled
l It is recommended to set this parameter to Disabled. l If the equipment of the customer adopts the auto negotiation, the value of the Auto Negotiation parameter must be consistent with the value of the Auto Negotiation parameter of the equipment of the customer. l The Auto Negotiation parameter must be consistent for the OTUs in the same protection group.
Intelligent Fiber Status
Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled
When a link is faulty, and the fault state must be transparently transmitted to the interconnected client-side equipment, the IF function needs to be enabled. l This parameter is valid only when Service Type of the optical port is set to GE. l This parameter is invalid after the LPT function of the board is enabled.
SD Trigger Condition
SM_BIP8_SD, PM_BIP8_SD, B1_SD Default: None
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled
This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger Flag is set to Enable. all the alarms can be set as the SD switching conditions. This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to GE. l The LPT function can work only with intraboard 1+1 protection and cannot work with any other protection. l Set this parameter to Enabled when you want to enable the LPT function; otherwise, keep the default value for this parameter.
8B10B Code Violation Threshold
0 to 15 Default: 15
This parameter is valid only when the service type at an optical interface is FC100, FC200, FICON, ESCON, FICON EXPRESS, or DVB-ASI. The default value is recommended.
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled Default: /
l Retain the default value when a network works normally. l Set this parameter to Enabled for the auxiliary board if you need to perform a RPBS test during deployment commissioning. Set this parameter to Disabled after the test is complete.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-43
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
The parameter format is as follows: band type/wavelength No./ optical interface wavelength/ frequency, for example, CWDM/ 11/1471.00/208.170.
This parameter is for query only.
Default: Band Type
C, CWDM
This parameter is for query only.
Default: / Optical Interface/ Channel
-
-
Optical Interface Name
-
-
5.7.8 Configuring the LQM2 Board When the LQM2 board works in 2LQM mode, it is applicable to the convergence of double four services at Any rate or regeneration of two OTU1 services. When the LQM2 board works in AP8 mode, it is applicable to the convergence of eight services at Any rate or regeneration of one OTU1 service.
Prerequisite You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows: l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter.
5-44
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
NOTE
You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.
Background Information The LQM2 board has two service processing chips, each of which provides 16 timeslots for receiving services. Different types of services require different number of timeslots. The total number of timeslots for the services received at the LQM2 board must be smaller than the maximum number of timeslots that the service processing chip can provide. l
In 2LQM mode, the total number of timeslots for the services configured at the TX1/RX1, TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, and TX4/RX4 interfaces must be not greater than 16 and the total number of timeslots for the services configured at the TX5/RX5, TX6/RX6, TX7/RX7, and TX8/RX8 interfaces must be not greater than 16.
l
In AP8 mode, the total number of timeslots for the services configured at all client-side interfaces must be not greater than 16.
Table 5-4 lists the number of timeslots required by common services. Table 5-4 Number of timeslots required by common services Service Type
Number of Timeslots Required
Service Type
Number of Timeslots Required
GE/GE(GFP_T)
7
FICON
6
STM-1
1
FICON EXPRESS
12
STM-4
4
ESCON
2
STM-16
16
DVB-ASI
2
FC200
12
HDTV
12
FC100
6
HDTV14835
12
FE
1
OTU1
16
FC100_SLICE
8
FICON_SLICE
8
FC200_SLICE
16
GE_SLICE
12
FICON_EXPRESS_ SLICE
16
-
-
In case of GE services, the committed information rate can be configured to change the number of timeslots required. Table 5-5 lists the number of timeslots required by GE services at different bandwidths.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-45
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Table 5-5 Number of timeslots required by GE services Bandwidth (Mbit/ s)
Number of Timeslots Required
Bandwidth (Mbit/ s)
Number of Timeslots Required
931-1000
7
311-465
3
776-930
6
156-310
2
621-775
5
1-155
1
466-620
4
-
-
The LQM2 board supports slice services, such as GE_SLICE, FC100_SLICE, FC200_SLICE, FICON_SLICE, and FICON_EXPRESS_SLICE. Compared with common services, slice services feature better performance in transparent transmission of clock but require more timeslots. In practical application, select a proper service type according to the actual conditions. For example, when the LQM2 board is used to receive FC100 services, select FC100_SLICE if better performance in transparent transmission of clock is required and timeslots are sufficient. Otherwise, select FC100 so that more timeslots can be used to receive other types of services.
Precautions
CAUTION If you delete a logical LQM2 board and configure it again on the NMS, the original configuration of the board is deleted and the default configuration is restored.
5-46
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Parameter Settings Field
Value
Description
Board Mode
AP8 Mode, 2LQM Mode
l Set this parameter to 2LQM Mode when the LQM2 board is used for converging double four services at Any rate or regenerating two channels of OTU1 signals. In this mode, two channels of signals are sent on the WDM side in a single-fed and single receiving manner.
Default: 2LQM Mode
l Set this parameter to AP8 Mode when the LQM2 board is used for converging eight services at Any rate or regenerating one channel of OTU1 signals. In this mode, signals are sent by optical interfaces on the WDM side in a dual fed and selective receiving manner. NOTE Before changing the working mode of the LQM2 board, ensure that no cross-connection or service is configured on the board. If a cross-connection or service is configured on the board, delete the cross-connection or service and set Service Type to Nonebefore you change the working mode of the board. CAUTION Switching between different working modes on a board interrupts the existing services.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-47
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Field
Value
Description
Service Type
OTU-1, DVB-ASI, HDTV, ESCON, FC-100, FC-100 (slice), FC-200, FC-200 (slice), FE, FICON, FICON express, FICON express (slice), FICON (slice), GE, GE(GFP-T), GE_SLICE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, None
Requirements on the number of timeslots for service configuration are as follows:
Default: OTU-1 (in the case of the TX1/ RX1 and TX5/RX5 interfaces) or None (in the case of the other client-side optical interfaces)
l In 2LQM mode, the total number of timeslots for the services configured at the TX1/RX1, TX2/ RX2, TX3/RX3, and TX4/RX4 interfaces must be not greater than 16 and the total number of timeslots for the services configured at the TX5/ RX5, TX6/RX6, TX7/RX7, and TX8/RX8 interfaces must be not greater than 16. l In AP8 mode, the total number of timeslots for the services configured at all client-side interfaces must be not greater than 16. Rate requirements for service configuration are as follows: l In the case of convergence of double four services at Any rate (2LQM mode), the TX1/ RX1 and TX5/RX5 optical interfaces support service rates in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and the other client-side optical interfaces support service rates in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s. l In the case of convergence of eight services at Any rate (AP8 mode), the TX1/RX1 optical interface supports service rates in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and the other client-side optical interfaces support service rates in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s. l In the case of regeneration of two OTU1 services (2LQM mode), set Service Type to OTU1 for the TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 optical interfaces. l In the case of regeneration of one OTU1 service (AP8 mode), set Service Type to OTU1 for the TX1/RX1 optical interface. NOTE After you configure a cross-connection for the board, setting the Service Type field fails if the service type selected during cross-connection configuration is different from the value you set for Service Type. In this case, you need to delete the cross-connection and set the Service Type field again.
5-48
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused
l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel that is not used.
Default: Used
l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that is used. Examples are as follows: l When the LQM2 board is used for converging double four services at Any rate (2LQM mode) or eight services at Any rate (AP8 mode), set Channel Use Status to Used for all WDM-side optical interfaces and set this parameter for all client-side optical interfaces according to the actual network design. l When the LQM2 board is used for regenerating two OTU1 services (2LQM mode), set Channel Use Status to Used for the TX1/RX1, IN1/ OUT1, TX5/RX5, and IN2/OUT2 optical interfaces and to Unused for the other optical interfaces. l When the LQM2 board is used for regenerating one OTU1 service (AP8 mode), set Channel Use Status to Used for the TX1/RX1, and IN1/ OUT1 optical interfaces and to Unused for the other optical interfaces. Automatic Laser Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
l The default value is recommended.
Default: Disabled (in the case of TX1/RX1, and TX5/RX5 interfaces), Enabled (in the case of the other client-side optical interfaces), or Disabled (in the case of WDM-side optical interfaces)
l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other values are invalid. In practical application, set this parameter according to the scenario where the board is used. Examples are as follows: l When the LQM2 board is used for converging double four services at Any rate (2LQM mode) or eight services at Any rate (AP8 mode), set Automatic Laser Shutdown to Disabled for all WDM-side optical interfaces and to Enabled for all client-side optical interfaces. l When the LQM2 board is used for regenerating two OTU1 services (2LQM mode), set Automatic Laser Shutdown to Disabled for the TX1/RX1, IN1/OUT1, TX5/RX5, and IN2/ OUT2 optical interfaces. Retain the default value for the other optical interfaces. l When the LQM2 board is used for regenerating one OTU1 service (AP8 mode), set Automatic Laser Shutdown to Disabled for the TX1/RX1, and IN1/OUT1 optical interfaces. Retain the default value for the other optical interfaces.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-49
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
5-50
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Field
Value
Description
Hold-Off Time of Automatic Laser Shutdown
0s to 2s, with a step of 100 ms.
The default value is recommended.
Default: 0s
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
Laser Status
Open, Close
The default value is recommended. In practical application, set this parameter according to the scenario where the board is used. Examples are as follows:
Default: l WDM side: Open l Client side: Close
l When the LQM2 board is used for converging double four services at Any rate (2LQM mode) or eight services at Any rate (AP8 mode), set Laser Status to On for all WDM-side optical interfaces. Automatic Laser Shutdown of client-side optical interfaces is set to Enabled. Hence, lasers on client-side optical interfaces is enabled or disabled automatically according to the signal receiving conditions at the WDM-side optical interfaces on the local board and the signal receiving conditions at the client-side optical interfaces on the opposite board. That is, you do not need to set this parameter manually. l When the LQM2 board is used for regenerating two OTU1 services (2LQM mode), set Laser Status to On for the TX1/RX1, IN1/OUT1, TX5/RX5, and IN2/OUT2 optical interfaces and to Off for the other optical interfaces. l When the LQM2 board is used for regenerating one OTU1 service (AP8 mode), set Laser Status to On for the TX1/RX1, and IN1/OUT1 optical interfaces and to Off for the other optical interfaces. CAUTION If the communication between NEs is achieved through only the ESC provided by the LQM2 board, the following situations occur when neither a standby channel is available nor protection is configured: l The NE becomes unreachable after the WDM-side lasers on the LQM2 board are disabled when the LQM2 board is used for converging double four services at Any rate (2LQM mode) or eight services at Any rate (AP8 mode). l The NE becomes unreachable after the lasers at the TX1/RX1, IN1/OUT1, TX5/RX5, and IN2/OUT2 optical interfaces on the LQM2 board are disabled when the LQM2 board is used for regenerating two OTU1 services (2LQM mode). l The NE becomes unreachable after the lasers at the TX1/RX1, and IN1/OUT1 optical interfaces on the LQM2 board are disabled when the LQM2 board is used for regenerating one OTU1 service (AP8 mode).
FEC Working Enabled, Disabled State Default: Enabled
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
l Enabled is recommended. l FEC Working State of the two interconnected OTU boards must be consistent.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-51
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Field
Value
Description
Guaranteed Bandwidth for ClientSide GE Service (M)
1-1000
l Users determine the ensure bandwidth for GE services based on the needs. This parameter needs to be configured only for GE services.
Default: 1000
l The value of the Guaranteed Bandwidth for Client-Side GE Service (M) parameter must be greater than the actual service bandwidth of users. Only in this case, no packet loss can be ensured. l Retain the default value when timeslots are sufficient. l When timeslots are insufficient, decrease the committed information rate of GE services to decrease the number of timeslots required. This is to ensure that the total number of timeslots is within the required range. For example, when the TX1/RX1, TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, and TX4/ RX4 interfaces are used to receive GE services, the CIR can be set to 620 Mbit/s. In this case, each GE service uses four timeslots. Hence, the total number of timeslots required by the services received at the TX1/RX1, TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, and TX4/RX4 interfaces is not greater than 16.
Optical Interface Loopback
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback
Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when a network works normally. It can be set to Inloop or Outloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or a process of removing a fault on a network. However, it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the test is complete or the fault is removed. When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is set to the default value Enabled, the loopback setting is automatically cancelled after Auto Disabling Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses.
Max. Packet Length
5-52
1518-9600 Default: 9600
This paramter is valid only when Service Type is set to GE. The default value is recommended.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
AutoNegotiation of GE
Enabled, Disabled
The Auto Negotiation parameter is available only when the Service Type parameter is set to GE.
Default: Disabled
l It is recommended to set this parameter to Disabled. l If the equipment of the customer adopts the auto negotiation, the value of the Auto Negotiation parameter must be consistent with the value of the Auto Negotiation parameter of the equipment of the customer. l The Auto Negotiation parameter must be consistent for the OTUs in the same protection group.
Intelligent Fiber Status
Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled
When a link is faulty, and the fault state must be transparently transmitted to the interconnected client-side equipment, the IF function needs to be enabled. l This parameter is valid only when Service Type of the optical port is set to GE. l This parameter is invalid after the LPT function of the board is enabled.
SD Trigger Condition
SM_BIP8_SD, PM_BIP8_SD, B1_SD Default: None
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled
This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger Flag is set to Enable. all the alarms can be set as the SD switching conditions. This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to GE. l The LPT function can work only with intraboard 1+1 protection and cannot work with any other protection. l Set this parameter to Enabled when you want to enable the LPT function; otherwise, keep the default value for this parameter.
8B10B Code Violation Threshold
0 to 15 Default: 15
This parameter is valid only when the service type at an optical interface is FC100, FC200, FICON, ESCON, FICON EXPRESS, or DVB-ASI. The default value is recommended.
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled Default: /
l Retain the default value when a network works normally. l Set this parameter to Enabled for the auxiliary board if you need to perform a RPBS test during deployment commissioning. Set this parameter to Disabled after the test is complete.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-53
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
The parameter format is as follows: band type/wavelength No./ optical interface wavelength/ frequency, for example, CWDM/ 11/1471.00/208.170.
This parameter is for query only.
Default: / Band Type
C, CWDM
This parameter is for query only.
Default: / Optical Interface/ Channel
-
-
Optical Interface Name
-
-
5.7.9 Configuring the LSPL or LSPU Board The LSPL board must be used in pairs with the LSPU board. The LSPL board interconnects with the OLT equipment and the LSPU board interconnects with the ONU equipment.
Prerequisite You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows: l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. NOTE
You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.
5-54
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Parameter Settings Field
Value
Description
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused
l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel that is not used.
Default: Used
l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that is used. Automatic Laser Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
l The default value is recommended.
Default: Enabled for client-side optical interfaces, and Disabled for WDMside optical interfaces.
l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other values are invalid.
Hold-Off Time of Automatic Laser Shutdown
0s to 2s, with a step of 100 ms.
The default value is recommended.
Laser Status
Open, Close
Default: 0s
Default: l WDM side: Open l Client side: Close
l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every WDM-side optical interface. l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain the default value because Automatic Laser Shutdown is usually set to Enabled. CAUTION If the communication between NEs is achieved through only the ESC provided by the LSPL/LSPU board, do not disable the WDM-side lasers on the LSPL/LSPU board. Otherwise, NEs become unreachable when neither a standby channel is available nor protection is configured.
FEC Working Enabled, Disabled State Default: Enabled
l Enabled is recommended.
SD Trigger Condition
This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger Flag is set to Enable. all the alarms can be set as the SD switching conditions.
SM_BIP8_SD, PM_BIP8_SD Default: None
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
The parameter format is as follows: band type/wavelength No./ optical interface wavelength/ frequency, for example, CWDM/ 11/1471.00/208.170.
l FEC Working State of the two interconnected OTU boards must be consistent.
This parameter is for query only.
Default: -
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-55
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
Band Type
C, CWDM
This parameter is for query only.
Default: / Optical Interface/ Channel
-
-
Optical Interface Name
-
-
5.7.10 Configuring the LSPR Board The LSPR board interconnects with the OLT equipment at the RX1/TX1 optical interfaces and with the ONU equipment at the RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to achieve the distance extension of one GPON service through the retiming, reshaping, and regeneration (3R) function in transparent transmission.
Prerequisite You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows: l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. NOTE
You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.
Parameter Settings Field
Value
Description
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused
l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel that is not used.
Default: Used
l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that is used. 5-56
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
l The default value is recommended.
Default: Enabled for client-side optical interfaces, and Disabled for WDMside optical interfaces.
l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other values are invalid.
Hold-Off Time of Automatic Laser Shutdown
0s to 2s, with a step of 100 ms.
The default value is recommended.
Laser Status
Open, Close
Default: 0s
Default: l WDM side: Open l Client side: Close
l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every WDM-side optical interface. l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain the default value because Automatic Laser Shutdown is usually set to Enabled. CAUTION If the communication between NEs is achieved through only the ESC provided by the LSPR board, do not disable the WDM-side lasers on the LSPR board. Otherwise, NEs become unreachable when neither a standby channel is available nor protection is configured.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
The parameter format is as follows: band type/wavelength No./ optical interface wavelength/ frequency, for example, CWDM/ 11/1471.00/208.170.
This parameter is for query only.
Default: Band Type
C, CWDM
This parameter is for query only.
Default: /
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Optical Interface/ Channel
-
-
Optical Interface Name
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-57
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
5.7.11 Configuring the LSX Board The LSX board is applicable to two scenarios: transparent transmission of one channel of 10G bit/s optical signals and regeneration of one channel of OTU2 or OTU2v optical signals.
Prerequisite You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows: l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. NOTE
You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.
Parameter Settings Field
Value
Description
Service Type
10GE LAN, OTU-2, OTU-2v, STM-64
Select a proper value according to the received services.
Default: OTU-2 Port Mapping
Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)
This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to 10GE LAN. l When a board is used to transparently transmit synchronous Ethernet services, this parameter must be set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). l Select Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) when there are OTU2v signals on the WDM side. l Select MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) when there are OTU2 signals on the WDM side. NOTE l Port mapping of the two boards that are interconnected with each other must be consistent.
5-58
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Field
Value
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Description
FEC Working Enabled, Disabled State Default: Enabled
l Enabled is recommended.
FEC Mode
This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled.
FEC, AFEC Default: FEC
l FEC Working State of the two interconnected OTU boards must be consistent.
l The default value is recommended. To improve the error correction capability, set this parameter to AFEC. l FEC Mode of the two boards that are interconnected on the WDM side must be consistent. Otherwise, services are interrupted. Channel Use Status
Used, Unused Default: Used
l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel that is not used. l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that is used.
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Hold-Off Time of Automatic Laser Shutdown
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Enabled, Disabled
l The default value is recommended.
Default: Enabled for client-side optical interfaces, and Disabled for WDMside optical interfaces.
l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other values are invalid.
0s to 2s, with a step of 100 ms.
The default value is recommended.
In practical application, set this parameter according to the scenario where the board is used. For example, when the LSX board is used for regenerating OTU2 or OTU2v signals, set Automatic Laser Shutdown to Disabled for RX/ TX and IN/OUT optical interfaces.
Default: 0s
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-59
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Field
Value
Description
Laser Status
Open, Close
l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every WDM-side optical interface.
Default: l WDM side: Open l Client side: Close
l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain the default value because Automatic Laser Shutdown is usually set to Enabled. In practical application, set this parameter according to the scenario where the board is used. For example, when the LSX board is used for regenerating OTU2 or OTU2v signals, set Laser Status to On for RX/TX and IN/OUT optical interfaces. CAUTION If the communication between NEs is achieved through only the ESC provided by the LSX board, the following situations occur when neither a standby channel is available nor protection is configured: l When the LSX board is used for regenerating OTU2 or OTU2v signals, the NE becomes unreachable after the lasers at the RX/TX and IN/OUT optical interfaces on the LSX board are disabled. l When the LSX board is used for transparently transmitting the 10 Gbit/s optical signals, the NE becomes unreachable after the lasers at the IN and OUT optical interfaces on the LSX board are disabled.
NonIntrusive Monitoring Status
Enabled, Disabled
Optical Interface Loopback
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop
Default: Disabled
Default: NonLoopback
This parameter is valid when the board is used to receive SDH services. The default value is recommended. Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when a network works normally. It can be set to Inloop or Outloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or a process of removing a fault on a network. However, it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the test is complete or the fault is removed. When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is set to the default value Enabled, the loopback setting is automatically cancelled after Auto Disabling Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses.
Max. Packet Length
1518-9600
SD Trigger Condition
SM_BIP8_SD, PM_BIP8_SD, B1_SD
Default: 9600
Default: None
5-60
This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to 10GE LAN and Port Mapping is set to MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G). The default value is recommended. This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger Flag is set to Enable. all the alarms can be set as the SD switching conditions.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
This parameter is valid when Service Type is set to 10GE LAN and Port Mapping is set to MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).
Default: Disabled
l The LPT function can work only with intraboard 1+1 protection and cannot work with any other protection. l Set this parameter to Enabled when you want to enable the LPT function; otherwise, keep the default value for this parameter. PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled Default: /
l Retain the default value when a network works normally. l Set this parameter to Enabled for the auxiliary board if you need to perform a RPBS test during deployment commissioning. Set this parameter to Disabled after the test is complete.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
The parameter format is as follows: band type/wavelength No./ optical interface wavelength/ frequency, for example, CWDM/ 11/1471.00/208.170.
This parameter is for query only.
Default: Band Type
C, CWDM
This parameter is for query only.
Default: / Optical Interface/ Channel
-
-
Optical Interface Name
-
-
5.7.12 Configuring the LWX2 Board The LWX2 board is applicable to two scenarios: transparent transmission of two services at Any rate and regeneration of two OTU1 services.
Prerequisite You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-61
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows: l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. NOTE
You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.
Background Information Table 5-6 describes the service rates of common service types. Table 5-6 Service rates of common service types Service Type OTN
OTU1
2667.0
STM-16
2488.3
STM-4
622.2
SDH
STM-1
155.5
SAN
FC200
2125.0
FC100
1062.5
FC50
531.2
FC25
255.6
GE
1250.0
FE
125.0
Ethernet
5-62
Service Rate (Mbit/s)
ESCON
200.0
FICON
1062.0
FICON EXPRESS
2124.0
DVB-ASI
270.0
HDTV
1485.0 or 1483.5
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Parameter Settings Field
Value
Description
Client Side Service Bearer Rate (M)
Any rate in the range of 42 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s rate excluding the ranges of 400 Mbit/s to 500 Mbit/s, 800 Mbit/s to 1000 Mbit/s, and 1.6 Gbit/s to 2.0 Gbit/s
Select a proper service type according to the actually received services or enter a service rate directly. The service rate must be accurate to 0.1 Mbit/s. For example, when the board is used to receive STM-16 services, you need to enter 2488.3.
Default: 2667.0 Mbit/ s
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused Default: Used
NOTE After you set Client Service Bearer Rate (M) for the RX1/TX1 and the RX2/TX2 optical interfaces, the service rates are automatically updated at the corresponding IN1/ OUT1 and IN3/OUT3 optical interfaces. That is, you do not need to set Client Service Bearer Rate (M) for the IN1/OUT1 and IN3/OUT3 optical interfaces. When setting the service rates at the IN1/OUT1 and IN3/OUT3 optical interfaces, make sure that the service rates on the client and WDM sides of the same channel are the same. That is, the service rate at the RX1/TX1 optical interfaces must be the same as that at the corresponding IN1/OUT1 optical interfaces; the service rate at the RX2/TX2 optical interfaces must be the same as that at the corresponding IN3/OUT3 optical interfaces.
l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel that is not used. l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that is used.
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
l The default value is recommended.
Default: Enabled for client-side optical interfaces, and Disabled for WDMside optical interfaces.
l This parameter must be set to Disabledin the case of WDM-side optical ports. That is, other values are invalid. In practical application, set this parameter according to the scenario where the board is used. For example, when the LWX2 board functions as a regeneration board, set Automatic Laser Shutdown to Disabled for the IN1/OUT1, IN3/ OUT3, RX1/TX1, and RX2/TX2 optical ports. NOTE When OTU1 services are received on the client side, the ALS function is disabled on the LWX2 board. That is, all lasers stay in enabled state.
Hold-Off Time of Automatic Laser Shutdown
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
0s to 2s, with a step of 100 ms.
The default value is recommended.
Default: 0s
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-63
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Field
Value
Description
Laser Status
Open, Close
l Usually, this parameter is set to Open for every WDM-side optical interface.
Default: l WDM side: Open l Client side: Close
l In the case of client-side optical interfaces, retain the default value because Automatic Laser Shutdown is usually set to Enabled. In practical application, set this parameter according to the scenario where the board is used. Examples are as follows: l When the LWX2 board is used as a regeneration board, set Laser Status to On for the IN1/ OUT1, IN3/OUT3, RX1/TX1, and RX2/TX2 optical ports. l When the LWX2 board is used as a transparent transmission board, set Laser Status to On for the IN1/OUT1, and IN3/OUT3 optical ports. Automatic Laser Shutdown of the RX1/TX1, and RX2/TX2 optical interfaces is set to Enabled. Hence, lasers on client-side optical interfaces are enabled and disabled automatically according to the signal receiving conditions. That is, you do not need to set this parameter manually. CAUTION If the LWX2 board is used as a regeneration board between NEs and NEs communicates with each other through only the ESC provided by the OTU regenerated on the LWX2 board, do not disable the lasers on the LWX2 board. Otherwise, NEs become unreachable when neither a standby channel is available nor protection is configured.
Optical Interface Loopback
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback
Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when a network works normally. It can be set to Inloop or Outloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or a process of removing a fault on a network. However, it must be set to Non-Loopback right after the test is complete or the fault is removed. When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is set to the default value Enabled, the loopback setting is automatically cancelled after Auto Disabling Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses.
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled Default: /
l Retain the default value when a network works normally. l Set this parameter to Enabled for the auxiliary board if you need to perform a RPBS test during deployment commissioning. Set this parameter to Disabled after the test is complete.
5-64
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Field
Value
Description
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
The parameter format is as follows: band type/wavelength No./ optical interface wavelength/ frequency, for example, CWDM/ 11/1471.00/208.170.
This parameter is for query only.
Default: Band Type
C, CWDM
This parameter is for query only.
Default: / Optical Interface/ Channel
-
-
Optical Interface Name
-
-
5.7.13 Configuring the SCC Board The SCC board provides the DCC channels for the interworking and intercommunication between NEs.
Prerequisite You must have logged in to the NE where the board resides.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select a proper navigation path according to the parameters. The details are as follows: l In the case of a parameter at channel level, select By Board/Port(Channel), choose Channel from the drop-down list, and click the Basic Attributes or Advanced Attributes tab. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. l In the case of a parameter at board level, select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Board from the drop-down list. Then, you can query or set the corresponding parameter. NOTE
You can also select By Function and then choose the required parameter from the drop-down list.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-65
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Parameter Settings Field
Value
Description
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused
l If the OSC channel is not configured or used in the network planning, set the Channel Use Status field to Unused for the TM1/RM1 and TM2/RM2 optical interfaces.
Default: Used
l If the OSC channel is configured and used in the network planning, set the Channel Use Status field to Used for the TM1/RM1 and TM2/RM2 optical interfaces. Open, Close
Laser Status
Default: l WDM side: Open l Client side: Close
l If the OSC channel is not configured or used in the network planning, set the Laser Status field to OFF for the TM1/RM1 and TM2/RM2 optical interfaces. l If the OSC channel is configured and used in the network planning, set the Laser Status field to ON for the TM1/RM1 and TM2/RM2 optical interfaces. CAUTION If the communication between NEs is achieved through only the OSC, the NEs are unreachable after the lasers at the TM1/RM1 and TM2/RM2 optical interfaces on the SCC board are disabled.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
The parameter format is as follows: band type/wavelength No./ optical interface wavelength/ frequency, for example, CWDM/ 11/1471.00/208.170.
This parameter is for query only.
Default: Band Type
C, CWDM
This parameter is for query only.
Default: / Optical Interface/ Channel
-
-
Optical Interface Name
-
-
5.8 Creating Fibers You are recommended to create fibers in graphic mode in the Main Topology or signal flow view. 5-66
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Prerequisite Optical NEs, NEs, and logical boards must be created.
Tools, Meters, and Materials The T2000 must be used.
Precautions NOTE
Fibers must be created properly according to the actual network. With fibers created properly, you can understand the network architecture and locate faults intuitively during the operation and maintenance of the network. NOTE
You are recommended to create internal fibers of an NE in the signal flow view and fibers between NEs in the Main Topology.
Procedure l
Operations on the T2000 1.
Double-click an optical NE in the Main Topology. Then, click the Signal Flow Diagram tab in the displayed window. In Signal Flow Diagram, right-click a blank space and choose Create Fiber from the shortcut menu. The cursor is displayed as "+".
2.
Select the source board and port and then click OK. The cursor is displayed as "+".
3.
Select the sink board and port and then click OK. TIP
When an incorrect source/sink board or port is selected, right-click to cancel the operation and exit the object selection.
4.
In the displayed Create Fiber/Cable dialog box, enter the attributes of the fiber/cable and then click OK to create an internal fiber of the NE. Create all other internal fibers of the NE in the same way.
5.
In the Main Topology, click the shortcut icon Then, click the source NE of the fiber/cable.
6.
In the displayed Select Fiber/Cable Source dialog box, select the source board and port and then click OK to return to the Main Topology. The cursor again is displayed as "+".
7.
In the Main Topology, click the sink NE of the fiber/cable. In the displayed Select Fiber/Cable Source dialog box, select the sink board and port, and then click OK.
8.
Enter the attributes of the fiber/cable in the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box and then click OK. The created fiber/cable between the source NE and the sink NE is displayed in the Main Topology. Create fibers/cables between all NEs on the network in the same way.
and the cursor is displayed as "+".
TIP
To delete a fiber, right-click a fiber that has been created and choose Delete.
----End Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-67
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Reference Information Clas sific ation
Item
Description
(Opti onal) Asso ciate d opera tions on the T200 0
Creating Fibers in List Mode
You can also create fibers in list mode on the T2000. Creating fibers in list mode is not intuitive when compared with creating fibers in graphic mode; however, you can manage all fibers/cables through a same user interface when creating fibers in list mode.
Configuring Services by Creating WDM Trails
You can configure services by creating WDM trails if the following conditions are met: (1) NEs on the network are not configured with services. (2) Fiber connections between these NEs have been created on the T2000. (3) All the NEs communicate with each other properly.
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5.9 Configuring Cross-Connection Service The LQG and LQM2 boards support configuration of cross-connections and the methods of configuring cross-connections on the two boards are the same. By default, a cross-connection created on the LQG and LQM2 boards is a direct cross-connection.
Prerequisite You must have logged in to the NE where the LQG or LQM2 board resides. Service types must be set for WDM optical interfaces on the board.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Precautions
CAUTION When configuring a cross-connection, ensure that the WDM-side path numbers at the transmit and receive ends are consistent. Otherwise, the service cannot be available.
5-68
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
CAUTION When the board that supports cross-connection carries electrical interface services, non-straightthrough cross-connections cannot configured for the electrical interface services on the board. NOTE
For the cross-connect slots that the LQM2 and LQG boards support on the chassis, see the Hardware Description. TIP
When configuring cross-connections for a service, you need to configure one cross-connection on the NE where this service is added and another cross-connection on the NE where this service is dropped. When you need to configure cross-connections for multiple services on a network, select either of the following methods to configure the cross-connections for all these services: l On a per-NE basis: Configure cross-connections on one NE and then on another NE. In this manner, configure cross-connections on all NEs on the network in turn. l On a per-service basis: Configure cross-connections for one service and then for another service. In this manner, configure cross-connections for all services in turn.
Procedure l
l
Operations on the Web LCT 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Electrical CrossConnection Service Management from the Function Tree.
2.
On the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New, and the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.
3.
Set Level, Direction, Source Slot, Source Optical Port, Sink Slot, Sink Optical Port, Source Optical Channel, and Sink Optical Channel according to the crossconnection planning. Then, click Apply.
4.
After configuring all cross-connections, click OK.
Operations on the T2000 1.
Select the NE in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.
2.
On the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New, and the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.
3.
Set Level, Direction, Source Slot, Source Optical Port, Sink Slot, Sink Optical Port, Source Optical Channel, Sink Optical Channel, and Activate Immediately according to the cross-connection planning. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click OK. The procedure and precautions for the operations on the T2000 are the same as those on the Web LCT. Activate Immediately is generally set to Active.
----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-69
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Reference Information Clas sific ation
Item
Description
(Opti onal) Asso ciate d opera tion on the Web LCT
Delete a crossconnection
See this section to learn how to delete a cross-connection.
Confi gurati on exam ples by using the Web LCT
Configure transparent transmission of GE services
The LQM2 board is considered as an example to describe how to configure cross-connections for a GE service.
Configure transparent transmission of SAN services
The LQM2 board is considered as an example to describe how to configure cross-connections for a SAN service.
Configure transparent transmission of OTN services
The LQM2 board is considered as an example to describe how to configure cross-connections for an OTN service.
Configure transparent transmission of SDH services
The LQM2 board is considered as an example to describe how to configure cross-connections for an SDH service.
WDM crossconnection configuration
See this section to learn how to set the parameters for configuring a WDM cross-connection.
Para meter descr iption
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5.10 Configuring Services in Service Package Mode The service package module enables you to configure services on an NE in a one-click manner. This configuration method is easier and quicker. The OptiX OSN 1800 supports two types of service packages: GE service package and GE/STM-1 integrated service package. The LQM, LQM2, and LWX2 boards support the function of configuring services in service package mode.
Prerequisite You must have logged in to the NE where the LQM, LQM2, or LWX2 board resides. 5-70
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Background Information You can select the required service package during the deployment. Then, you can run the commands in the service package to configure services and query information the service package. You can run a command to manually apply a service package to an NE. In this manner, the services on all the service boards on this NE are configured automatically. In the process of applying a service package to an NE, the original configurations on the NE are deleted and the configuration commands are then executed. A service package actually contains a series of configuration commands. Some of these configuration commands are used for configuring crossconnections, and the other are used for configuring service types for optical interfaces. There is an exception that a service rate other than service type is configured for an optical interface in the case of the LWX2 board. Table 5-7 lists the service configurations for the LQM board in service package mode. Table 5-7 Service configurations for the LQM board in service package mode Service Package Type
3(TX1/RX1)
4(TX2/RX2)
5(TX3/RX3)
6(TX4/RX4)
GE bypass
GE
GE
Null
Null
GE/STM1 hybrid
GE
GE
STM-1
STM-1
Table 5-8 lists the service configurations for the LQM2 board in service package mode. Table 5-8 Service configurations for the LQM2 board in service package mode Service Packag e Type
3(TX1/ RX1)
4(TX2/ RX2)
5(TX3/ RX3)
6(TX4/ RX4)
7(TX5/ RX5)
8(TX6/ RX6)
9(TX7/ RX7)
10 (TX8/ RX8)
GE bypass
GE
GE
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
GE/ STM1 hybrid
GE
GE
STM-1
STM-1
Null
Null
Null
Null
Table 5-9 lists the service configurations for the LWX2 board in service package mode.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-71
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Table 5-9 Service configurations for the LWX2 board in service package mode Service Package Type
5(TX1/RX1)
6(TX2/RX2)
GE bypass
GE
GE
GE/STM1 hybrid
GE
GE
Precautions
CAUTION In the case of the LQM2 board, after the configuration commands in a service package are executed, a direct cross-connection between optical interface 3 and optical interface 4 is configured automatically. In the case of the LWX2 and LQM boards, the configuration commands in a service package cannot be used to create any cross-connection.
CAUTION Precautions for configuring services in service package mode l Service packages do not support expansion based on the existing services. If expansion is required, you need to delete the existing services before configuring services in service package mode. l In the process of applying a service package to an NE, the configurations on all boards on this NE are deleted and the service package is then implemented. l If the NE is reset in the process of configuring scripts, you need to restart the service package before you configure services.
CAUTION In the case of the LQM2 board, take the following precautions before configuring services in service package mode: l After configuring services in service package mode, if one of optical interfaces 3 to 6 on the LQM2 board needs to access another type of service, you need to reconfigure the service type manually for this optical interface. Otherwise, the service is unavailable. l If the current working mode of the LQM2 board is the 2LQM mode, the working mode of the board automatically changes to AP8 after service types are configured for the board in service package mode.
Procedure l 5-72
Operations on the Web LCT Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
l
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
1.
Select the NE in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > Service Package from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Query to view the existing service package types.
3.
Select Package Type according to the service planning requirement and then click Start. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click OK.
4.
Optional: To view the cross-connections created after the service package is configured, select the NE in the NE Explorer and then choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management from the Function Tree; to view the attributes of an optical interface on the board, select the board in the NE Explorer and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
Operations on the T2000 1.
Select the NE in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > Service Package from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Query to view the existing service package types.
3.
Select Package Type according to the service planning requirement and then click Start. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click OK. The precautions for the operations on the T2000 are the same as those on the Web LCT.
4.
After configuring the service package, upload the NE data. For details about uploading the NE data, see B.13.2 Uploading the NE Data.
5.
Optional: To view the cross-connections created after the service package is configured, select the NE in the NE Explorer and then choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree; to view the attributes of an optical interface on the board, select the board in the NE Explorer and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-73
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Reference Information Clas sific ation
Item
Description
(Opti onal) Asso ciate d opera tion on the Web LCT
Deleting CrossConnections
See this section to learn how to delete a cross-connection.
Confi gurati on exam ples by using the Web LCT
Configuring Transparent Transmission of GE Services in Service Package Mode
The LQM2 board is considered as an example to describe how to configure transparent transmission of GE services in service package mode.
Configuring Hybrid Transmission of GE and STM-1 Services in Service Package Mode
The LQM2 board is considered as an example to describe how to configure hybrid transmission of GE and STM-1 services in service package mode.
Para meter descr iption
WDM CrossConnection Configuration Parameters
See this section to learn how to set the parameters used for configuring a WDM cross-connection.
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5.11 Configuring SW SNCP Protection SW SNCP protection can be implemented by using convergence OTU boards that support crossconnections. This type of OTU boards includes the LQM2 and LQG boards.
Prerequisite You must have logged in to an NE. The NE must be configured with boards that support SW SNCP protection.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000 5-74
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Precautions NOTE
SW SNCP protection must be configured at both the sink and source. At the source, you need to configure cross-connections to implement dual transmitting; at the sink, you need to configure cross-connections to implement selective receiving.
Procedure l
Operations on the Web LCT 1.
In the NE Explorer of the NE that functions as the source NE of SW SNCP protection, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management from the Function Tree.
2.
On the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New, and the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed. In the dialog box, configure two cross-connections to implement dual transmitting. For details on how to configure a cross-connection, see 5.9 Configuring Cross-Connection Service. To implement dual transmitting on the source NE of SW SNCP protection, you need to configure two cross-connections, which share the same source but have different sinks. An example is as follows (1U chassis): – Source: 1-LQM2-3(RX1/TX1)-1; sink: 1-LQM2-201(LP1/LP1)-1 (this is a unidirectional cross-connection) – Source: 1-LQM2-3(RX1/TX1)-1; sink: 4-LQM2-201(LP1/LP1)-1 (this is a unidirectional cross-connection)
3.
In the NE Explorer of the NE that functions as the sink NE of SW SNCP protection, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management from the Function Tree. Click Create SNCP and the Create SNCP dialog box is displayed.
4.
Set the SW SNCP protection parameters to complete the configuration of crossconnections at the sink NE. After the cross-connections are configured at the sink NE, the selective receiving function of the sink NE is implemented. Table 5-10 Requirements for setting key parameters of SW SNCP protection
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Parameter Name
SW SNCP Protection
Protection Type
SW SNCP
SNCP Type
Unavailable
Service Type
GE
OTN Level
Unavailable
Revertive Mode
Non-revertive
WTR Time (s)
Unavailable
Working Channel Delay Time (100ms)
0
Protection Channel Delay Time (100ms)
0
SD Trigger Flag
Disabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-75
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
NOTE
The values listed in Table 5-10 are recommended values. Set the parameters properly according to engineering requirements in practical application.
Two cross-connections must be configured for Working Service and Protection Service. The two cross-connections have different sources but share the same sink. An example is as follows (1U chassis): – Source: 1-LQM2-201(LP1/LP1)-1; sink: 1-LQM2-3(RX1/TX1)-1 – Source: 4-LQM2-201(LP1/LP1)-1; sink: 1-LQM2-3(RX1/TX1)-1 NOTE
When configuring the cross-connections, you need to configure only the source for Protection Service but need to configure source and sink for Working Service.
5. l
5-76
Click OK. Then, the protection group is created and displayed in the user interface.
Operations on the T2000 1.
In the NE Explorer of the NE that functions as the source of SW SNCP protection, select the NE and then choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.
2.
On the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New, and the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed. In the dialog box, configure two cross-connections to implement dual transmitting. For details on how to configure a cross-connection, see 5.9 Configuring Cross-Connection Service.
3.
Click Create SNCP Service, and the Create SNCP Service dialog box is displayed. Set the SW SNCP protection parameters to complete the configuration of crossconnections at the sink NE. After the cross-connections are configured at the sink NE, Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
the selective receiving function of the sink NE is implemented. The precautions for configuring cross-connections on the T2000 are the same as those when crossconnections are configured by using the Web LCT. ----End
Reference Information Clas sific ation
Item
Description
(Opti onal) Asso ciate d opera tions on the Web LCT
Delete a crossconnection
See this section to learn how to delete a cross-connection.
Convert a service with SNCP protection into a service with no protection
A service with SNCP protection can be converted into a service with no protection.
Para meter descr iption
WDM crossconnection configuration
See this section to learn how to set the parameters for configuring a WDM cross-connection.
SNCP service control
See this section to learn how to set the parameters for controlling services with SNCP protection.
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5.12 Configuring Port Protection On the port protection user interface, you can configure intra-board 1+1 protection, optical line protection, client-side 1+1 protection, and inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel protection. Configure protection of an appropriate type according to the network design.
Prerequisite You must have logged in to an NE. The NE must be configured with boards that support port protection.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000 Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-77
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Background Information Observe the differences between intra-board 1+1 protection, optical line protection, client-side 1+1 protection, and inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel protection when configuring them. Table 5-11 lists the differences between these protection types. Table 5-11 Differences between different port protection types Protectio n Type
Supporting Board
Configuration Precaution
Intraboard 1+1 protection
l OTU boards with the dual fed and selective receiving function. This type of OTU boards includes LQG, LWX2, LDGF, LQM, LQM2 (AP8 mode), LSPU, LSPL, and LDGF2.
l The protection must be configured on both the sink and source NEs.
l OLP board and OTU boards with the single fed and single receiving function. This type of OTU boards includes the LOEU, LOEL, LOE, LSX and LQM2 (2LQM mode).
l The client-side service attributes of the working and protection channels must be the same. Otherwise, services are unavailable. l In the case of the intra-board 1+1 protection by using an OTU with the dual fed and selective receiving function, Channel Use Status of a WDM-side optical interface must be set to Used. Each of the WDM-side optical interfaces on the OTU can be configured as the working channel. When the protection group is deleted, the service is forcibly switched to optical interface 1 (IN1/OUT1) or optical interface 3 (IN3/ OUT3). l The NE will be unreachable by the NMS after the protection group is deleted if the following conditions are met: (1) Communication between NEs is implemented by using an ESC channel. (2) There is no standby channel. (3) Optical interfaces IN1 and IN3 receive no light.
5-78
Optical line protection
OLP
Client-side 1+1 protection
SCS board and convergence OTU board such as LQG, LWX2, LDGF, LDGF2, LQM, LQM2, LSPU, LSPL, LOEU, LOEL, LOE, LSX.
l The protection must be configured on both the sink and source NEs. l The working and protection channels at the receive end of the OLP board must have the same receive optical power. The variance threshold between primary and secondary input power is 5 dB by default. l The protection must be configured on both the sink and source NEs. l The working and protection OTU boards must be of the same type.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Protectio n Type
Supporting Board
Configuration Precaution
Intersubrack 1 +1 optical channel protection
OLP board and OTU board such as LQG, LWX2, LDGF, LDGF2, LQM, LQM2, LOEU, LOE, LSX.
l In the case of inter-subrack wavelength protection, the working OTU board and the protection OTU board are installed in different subracks. You are recommended to install the OLP board in the chassis where the working OTU board resides. l The working and protection OTU boards must be of the same type. l The LOEU and LOE boards support intersubrack protection only in the scenario where GE services are accessed.
For details about the preceding protection types, see the Feature Description.
Procedure l
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Operations on the Web LCT 1.
In the NE list, select the NE and then click the NE Explorer button.
2.
Choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree.
3.
In the Port Protection window, click New.
4.
Set parameters for the selected protection type. Click OK to display a dialog box. Then, click OK to complete the protection configuration.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-79
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Table 5-12 Requirements for setting parameters of different protection types Paramete r Name
5-80
Optical line protectio n
Intra-board 1+1 protection
Clientside 1+1 protectio n
Intersubrack 1 +1 optical channel protectio n
Impleme nted by Using OTU Boards with the Dual Fed and Selective Receiving Function
Impleme nted by Using OLP Boards and OTU Boards with the Single Fed and Single Receiving Function
Protection type
Optical line protection
Intra-board 1+1 protection
Intra-board 1+1 protection
Client-side 1+1 protection
Intersubrack 1 +1 optical channel protection
NE with the Working Channel
The NE where the OLP board resides. For example, NE7201.
The NE where the OTU board resides. For example, NE7201.
The NE where the OLP board resides. For example, NE7201.
The NE where the working OTU board resides. For example, NE7201.
The NE where the working OTU board resides. For example, NE7201.
Board with Working Channel
OLP board, for example, 4-OLP
OTU board, for example, 1-LQM2
OLP board, for example, 4-OLP
Working OTU board, for example, 1-LWX2
Working OTU board, for example, 4-LQM2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Paramete r Name
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Optical line protectio n
Intra-board 1+1 protection
Clientside 1+1 protectio n
Intersubrack 1 +1 optical channel protectio n
Impleme nted by Using OTU Boards with the Dual Fed and Selective Receiving Function
Impleme nted by Using OLP Boards and OTU Boards with the Single Fed and Single Receiving Function
Working Channel
The working channel on the OLP board. For example, 1 (RI1/TO1).
The working channel on the OTU board, namely, a WDM-side optical interface. For example, 1 (IN1/ OUT1).
The working channel on the OLP board. For example, 1 (RI1/TO1).
A clientside optical interface on the working OTU board. For example, 1 (RX1/ TX1).
A WDMside optical interface on the working OTU board. In the case of a convergen ce OTU board, you can select a client-side optical interface as the protection channel. For example, 3 (RX3/ TX3).
NE with Protection Channel
The NE where the OLP board resides. For example, NE7201.
The NE where the OTU board resides. For example, NE7201.
The NE where the OLP board resides. For example, NE7201.
The NE where the protection OTU board resides. For example, NE7201.
The NE where the protection OTU board resides. For example, NE7176.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-81
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Paramete r Name
5-82
Optical line protectio n
Intra-board 1+1 protection
Clientside 1+1 protectio n
Intersubrack 1 +1 optical channel protectio n
Impleme nted by Using OTU Boards with the Dual Fed and Selective Receiving Function
Impleme nted by Using OLP Boards and OTU Boards with the Single Fed and Single Receiving Function
Board with Protection Channel
OLP board, for example, 4-OLP
OTU board, for example, 1-LQM2
OLP board, for example, 4-OLP
Protection OTU board, for example, 3-LWX2
Protection OTU board, for example, 4-LQM2
Protection Channel
The protection channel on the OLP board. For example, 2 (RI2/TO2).
The protection channel on the OTU board, namely, a WDM-side optical interface. For example, 2 (IN2/ OUT2).
The protection channel on the OLP board. For example, 2 (RI2/TO2).
A clientside optical interface on the protection OTU board. For example, 1 (RX1/ TX1).
A WDMside optical interface on the protection OTU board. In the case of a convergen ce OTU board, you can select a client-side optical interface as the protection channel. For example, 3 (RX3/ TX3).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Paramete r Name
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Optical line protectio n
Intra-board 1+1 protection
Clientside 1+1 protectio n
Intersubrack 1 +1 optical channel protectio n
Impleme nted by Using OTU Boards with the Dual Fed and Selective Receiving Function
Impleme nted by Using OLP Boards and OTU Boards with the Single Fed and Single Receiving Function
NE with Control Channel/ Monitoring Channel
Unavailabl e
Unavailabl e
The NE where the OTU board resides. For example, NE7201.
Unavailabl e
The NE where the OLP board resides. This NE generally houses the working OTU board. For example, NE7201.
Board with Control Channel/ Monitoring Channel
Unavailabl e
Unavailabl e
OTU board, for example, 1-LQM2
Unavailabl e
OLP board, for example, 1-OLP
Control Channel/ Monitoring Channel
Unavailabl e
Unavailabl e
A WDMside optical interface on the OTU board. For example, 1 (IN1/ OUT1).
Unavailabl e
Optical interface 1 (RI1/TO1) on the OLP board
Working Channel Delay Time (100ms)
0
0
Unavailabl e
0
0
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-83
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Paramete r Name
Optical line protectio n
Intra-board 1+1 protection
Clientside 1+1 protectio n
Intersubrack 1 +1 optical channel protectio n
Impleme nted by Using OTU Boards with the Dual Fed and Selective Receiving Function
Impleme nted by Using OLP Boards and OTU Boards with the Single Fed and Single Receiving Function
Protection Channel Delay Time (100ms)
0
0
Unavailabl e
0
0
Control Channel/ Monitoring Channel Delay Time (100ms)
Unavailabl e
Unavailabl e
0
Unavailabl e
Unavailabl e
Revertive Mode
Nonrevertive
Nonrevertive
Unavailabl e
Nonrevertive
Nonrevertive
WTR Time (s)
Unavailabl e
Unavailabl e
Unavailabl e
Unavailabl e
Unavailabl e
SD Trigger Flag
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
NOTE
The values listed in Table 5-12 are recommended values. Set the parameters properly according to engineering requirements in practical application. NOTE
In the case of the intra-board 1+1 protection implemented by using the OLP board and the OTU board with single fed and single receiving function, the Revertive Mode field is unavailable. In the case of other protection types, if you set the Revertive Mode field to Revertive, you also need to set the WTR Time (s) field. The value of the WTR Time (s) field ranges from 300 to 720. The default value is 600.
5.
5-84
Optional: When configuring the intra-board 1+1 protection implemented by using OTU boards with the dual fed and selective receiving function, add an optical interface if an optical interface is idle but cannot be selected. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
(1) Click NE Panel. Right-click the board on which you need to add a port, and then choose Path View from the shortcut menu.
(2) Right-click a blank space in the path view and then choose Add Port from the shortcut menu.
(3) Select a number for the new port, for example, 2(IN2/OUT2). Retain the default port type, for example, Line Side Color Optical Port. Then, click OK. At this point, a new port is added.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-85
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
CAUTION Do not delete a port or change the port type unless required. l Services are interrupted after a port is deleted. l If the type of services received at a port is inconsistent with the default service type supported by the board, changing the port type results in a service interruption. l In the case of the LQM and LQM2 boards, after the port type is changed, the service type on the port is changed into None. The navigation path for deleting a port or changing the port type is as follows: Click Slot Layout. Right-click the board, and then choose Path View from the shortcut menu. Right-click the port and choose Delete Port or Modify Port Type as required. 6.
Optional: Repeat steps 1 to 4 to complete the protection configuration. TIP
After the protection is configured, select a protection group in the Port Protection window. In the right lower corner, you can click Delete to delete the protection group or click Modify to modify the parameters of the protection group.
CAUTION Deleting a protection group can make an NE unreachable. l
Operations on the T2000 1.
In the NE Explorer window, choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree.
2.
In the Port Protection window, click New. Set parameters for the selected protection type by referring to Table 5-12. The precautions for the operations on the T2000 are the same as those on the Web LCT.
3.
Optional: When configuring a protection group, you need to add a port in the NE Panel window if a port is idle but cannot be selected. In the NE Panel window, rightclick the board on which you need to add a port and then choose Path View. Rightclick a blank space in the path view and then choose Add Port from the shortcut menu. After adding a port, return to the Port Protection window to proceed with the protection configuration.
----End 5-86
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Reference Information Clas sific ation
Item
Description
Para meter descr iption
Port protection
See this section to learn how to set the parameters used for configuring port protection.
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5.13 Synchronizing the NE Time with the NMS Time With the time synchronization function, the NE time is kept consistent with the NMS time. In this way, the NMS is able to record the correct time when alarms and abnormal events are reported by NEs.
Prerequisite You must have logged in to an NE.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Background Information When NEs report alarms and abnormal events to the NMS, the generation time of such alarms and events is based on the NE time. If the NE time is incorrect, the generation time of the alarms recorded in the NMS is also incorrect, which may cause troubles in fault locating. The same case happens to the generation time of abnormal events that are recorded in the NE security log. To prevent the preceding problem, the NMS provides the function of synchronizing the NE time with the NMS time to ensure that the NE time is correct. With this function, all NEs can be synchronized with the NMS time manually or automatically. In this manner, all the NEs use the NMS time as the standard time. The NMS server time refers to the time of the computer system where the NMS server resides. This function features easy operation and applies to a network with relatively low requirement for time accuracy. Synchronizing NE time with the NMS time does not affect the existing services. Before synchronizing the NE time with the NMS time, make sure that the time of the computer system where the Web LCT/T2000 server resides is correct. If you need to change the computer system time, first exit the Web LCT/T2000. Then, restart the Web LCT/T2000 after re-setting the computer system time. Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-87
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Procedure l
Operations on the Web LCT 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Function Tree. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and then click Apply.
2.
Right-click the NE and then choose Synchronize with NM Time. In this manner, the NE time is synchronized with the NMS time immediately.
3.
Optional: Do as follows to set the function of automatically synchronizing the NE time with the NMS time. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and then click Apply.
4.
Optional: Set Synchronization Starting Time and Synchronization Period (days), and then click Apply. NOTE
Synchronization Starting Time cannot be earlier than the current time.
l
Operations on the T2000 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Function Tree. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
2.
Right-click the NE and then choose Synchronize with NM Time. A dialog box is displayed. Click Yes. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. In this manner, the NE time is synchronized with the NMS time immediately.
3.
Optional: Do as follows to set the function of automatically synchronizing the NE time with the NMS time. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and the click Apply.
4.
Optional: Set Synchronization Starting Time and Synchronization Period (days), and then click Apply. NOTE
Synchronization Starting Time cannot be earlier than the current time.
----End
Reference Information
5-88
Clas sific ation
Item
Description
Para meter descr iption
Parameters for Synchronizing NE Time
See this section to learn how to set the parameters associated with NE time synchronization.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5.14 Starting NE Performance Monitoring Enabling the performance monitoring function is a precondition for querying the performance events. If the current NE time is in the performance monitoring time range as set before, the NE monitors its performance events automatically. If the performance monitoring time range is not set or if the current NE time is not within the performance monitoring time range, the NE does not monitor its performance events.
Prerequisite The NE time must be synchronized with the NMS time. You must have logged in to an NE.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Precautions NOTE
The start time for monitoring NE performance must be later than the current time of the NMS and NE. If you need to monitor the performance immediately, set the start time just a little later than the current time of the NMS and NE. The end time must be later than the start time or you can keep the end time field blank.
Procedure l
Operations on the Web LCT 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Performance > NE Performance Monitoring Time from the Function Tree. In Performance Monitor Time, select the desired NE. NOTE
An NE must be selected in this step. Otherwise, it is impossible for you to proceed with the task.
2.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
In the 15-Minute Performance Monitor field, select Enabled and click behind the From field to set the start time for monitoring the 15-minute performance of the NE.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-89
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
TIP
The method of setting the time is as follows: In the hour, minute, or second time control, rightclick the time to increase it, or press Shift and right-click the time to decrease it.
l
3.
behind In the 24-Minute Performance Monitor field, select Enabled and click the From field to set the start time for monitoring the 24-minute performance of the NE.
4.
Click Apply to apply the settings.
Operations on the T2000 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Performance > NE Performance Monitoring Time from the Function Tree. TIP
You can also choose Performance > NE Performance Monitoring Time from the Main Menu, and then select the desired NE to display the user interface.
2.
In Performance Monitor Time, select the desired NE. NOTE
An NE must be selected in this step. Otherwise, it is impossible for you to proceed with the task.
3.
In the 15-Minute Performance Monitor field, select Enabled. Then, in the From field, enter the start time directly.
4.
In the 24-Minute Performance Monitor field, select Enabled. Then, in the From field, enter the start time directly.
5.
Click Apply. Then, in the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
----End
5-90
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Reference Information Clas sific ation
Item
Description
(Opti onal) Asso ciate d opera tions on the Web LCT
Set performance thresholds for a specified board
When an NE detects that a certain performance value exceeds the specified threshold, the NE reports a corresponding performance event. See this section to learn how to change the performance threshold of a specified board.
Set performance monitoring parameters of a board
The Web LCT/T2000 can monitor the performance of all boards on a network. The automatic reporting of detected performance values, however, is disabled by default. You can change the default setting as required.
Set performance monitoring parameters of an NE
Set the performance monitoring parameters of a specified NE properly and then enable the NE performance monitoring function. By doing so, you can obtain detailed description of performance records during the operation of the NE. This facilitates monitoring of the existing services and the equipment status.
Reset the performance register of a board
After a network test or fault recovery, you need to reset the performance register of a board as required before the board is put into operation. This is to start a new performance monitoring period.
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5.15 Searching and Creating WDM Trails After configuring services on an NE, search for WDM trails on the NE so that you can manage services based on WDM trails.
Prerequisite All fibers must be created properly. All required services must be configured properly on the NE.
Tools, Meters, and Materials The T2000 must be used.
Background Information The OptiX OSN 1800 supports searching for the following WDM trails on the T2000: Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-91
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
l
Client trail
l
ODUk trail
l
OTUk trail
l
OCh trail
l
OMS trail
l
OTS trail
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Of these WDM trails, you can manage OTS trails directly without searching for them, because the OTS trail data is stored at the network layer when fibers are connected.
Precautions NOTE
In the process of searching and creating WDM trails, discrete services may be generated. You need to analyze and remove the discrete services to ensure that no discrete service exist on the network at last.
Procedure l
Operations on the T2000 For detailed description of searching, creating, and managing WDM trails, see the online help for the T2000. 1.
In the Main Menu, choose Trail > WDM Trail Search to display the WDM Trail Search navigation.
2.
In the Advanced settings area, set various handling policies associated with trail searching.
NOTE
In the mode of searching for WDM trails by subnet, it is recommended that the selected subnet should be separate from the other portions of the network. That is, no fiber connection exists between the selected subnet and any other portion on the network.
5-92
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
3.
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Click Next to start searching for WDM trails. Wait until the status bar shows the end of the searching. NOTE
l If certain cross-connections conflict with each other and thus fail to form an end-to-end trail, the information about these cross-connections is displayed in the search result when the searching is complete. You can rectify the problem according to the conflict information. l Certain cross-connections may conflict with each other when the network architecture is changed or a trail that may cause an interruption of service flows exists. You can determine whether conflicting cross-connections exist by deleting certain routing information such as deleting a cross-connection or a fiber
4.
Optional: Click Next to view the information about the conflicting trails. Right-click a trail, you can configure it with a management flag. NOTE
If you have selected Automatically create trails after searching in the search policies, skip this step. If you perform this step, the NMS will remove the trails that are not configured with management flags from the network in the next step. The deletion does not affect the actual services on the NE and the data of the NE saved on the NMS.
5.
Click Next to view all discrete services on the network. NOTE
The possible causes of discrete services and the method for removing discrete services are as follows: l The data on the NE is inconsistent with that on the NMS. In this case, upload the configuration data to the NMS. l Fibers are created inappropriately and the created fiber connections are inconsistent with the physical fiber connections. In this case, check and ensure that the fiber connections created on the NMS are consistent with the physical fiber connections between real equipment. l NE configuration data is incorrect and service configuration is incomplete. In this case, correct the NE configuration data and configure services completely.
6.
Click Finish.
----End
Reference Information
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Clas sific ation
Item
Description
(Opti onal) Asso ciate d opera tion on the T200 0
Configuring Services by Creating WDM Trails
You can configure services by creating WDM trails if the following conditions are met: (1) NEs on the network are not configured with services. (2) Fiber connections between these NEs have been created on the T2000. (3) All the NEs communicate with each other properly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-93
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5.16 Checking Configurations in the Commissioning Process Correct setting of each system parameter is the precondition for ensuring normal network operation. Check the configurations of NEs and boards according to Table 5-13 and rectify inappropriate configurations, for example incorrect parameter settings and incomplete parameter settings. Table 5-13 Configuration checklist N o.
Item
Associated Operation
1
Communication between NEs on the network is normal and login to an NE is successful.
Searching and Creating NEs
2
NE IDs and names are changed properly according to the customer planning requirements.
Changing NE IDs and Names
3
NE IP addresses are changed properly according to the customer planning requirements.
Changing NE IP Addresses
4
When the network uses the HWECC communication protocol, a proper extended ECC communication mode is selected when the number of NEs that adopt the extended ECC communication exceeds nine.
Setting the Ethernet Extended ECC Communication
When the network uses IP over DCC communication protocol, the IP over DCC protocol is configured properly.
Configuring IP over DCC
5
Attributes of every WDM optical interface on a board are set properly.
Setting Attributes of WDM Optical Interfaces on Boards
6
In the case of the LQM2 or LQG, the crossconnections and SW SNCP protection are configured properly.
Configuring CrossConnections
Intra-board 1+1 protection, optical line protection, client-side 1+1 protection, and inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel protection are configured properly for a planned optical interface.
Configuring Port Protection
7
5-94
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Configuring SW SNCP Protection
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
N o.
Item
Associated Operation
8
All NEs are synchronized with the NMS time and NE performance monitoring can be enabled normally.
Synchronizing the NE Time with the NMS Time Enabling NE Performance Monitoring
TIP
In the actual commissioning and configuration process, you are recommended to check the configurations of an NE after configuring the NE.
See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5.17 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board By backing up an NE database to an SCC board, you can ensure that the NE automatically restores to the normal state in case a power failure occurs. When you back up an NE database to an SCC board, you actually back up the NE data to the flash memory of the SCC board. After a power-off reset occurs on the NE, the SCC board automatically reads the configuration data from the flash memory and applies the data to the boards on this NE.
Prerequisite You must have logged in to an NE. The NE must be configured properly.
Tools, Meters, and Materials The T2000 must be used.
Precautions NOTE
After backing up an NE database to an SCC board, you can restore the NE database from the SCC board by performing a warm or cold reset on the SCC board.
Procedure l
Operations on the T2000 1.
In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > Configuration Data Management.
2.
Select the NE from the Function Tree, and then click
3.
In Configuration Data Management List, select an NE or multiple NEs of which the database you want to back up. Click Back Up NE Data and select Back Up Database to SCC. In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click OK.
4.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
.
----End Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-95
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Reference Information Clas sific ation
Item
Description
(Opti onal) Asso ciate d opera tions on the T200 0
Compare the methods of backing up and restoring NE data
The backup or restored NE database can be saved on the SCC board, NMS server, or NMS client. Different storage locations determine different backup and restoration methods.
Restore the NE database from the SCC board
When a database file is lost due to a factor such as NE maintenance or NE fault, you can restore the DRDB database that has been backed up in the flash memory of the SCC board.
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5.18 Checking Optical Power of Boards By checking the optical power of a board, you can ensure that the transmit and receive optical power of the board is within the normal range. When commissioning the OptiX OSN 1800, you can adjust the optical power of a board at the site by adding, replacing, or removing a fixed optical attenuator (FOA) or adjusting a variable optical attenuator (VOA) before an optical interface.
Prerequisite The performance monitoring function must be enabled. Fiber connections must be established properly and lasers must be enabled.
Tools, Meters, and Materials The Web LCT or T2000 is used for querying the optical power of a board. The T2000 must be used for querying the optical power of the entire network.
Procedure l
5-96
Operations on the Web LCT 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the board whose optical power you need to query.
2.
Choose Configuration > Optical Power Management from the Function Tree.
3.
Click Query to read the current optical power value from the NE.
4.
Ensure that the input optical power value for each optical interface is in the range of Input Power Lower Threshold(dBm) and Input Power Upper Threshold(dBm). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
– If the input optical power value for an optical interface is greater than Input Power Lower Threshold(dBm), add a FOA or replace the existing FOA before the optical interface to ensure that the input optical power meets the design requirement. – If the input optical power value is smaller than Input Power Upper Threshold (dBm), do as follows: – Check the transmit optical power of the opposite board. If the transmit optical power of this board is abnormal, replace the transmitter on this board. – Check whether appropriate FOAs are installed on the link against the FOA installation table. – Check and clean the fiber endfaces and flanges on the ODF. – Check whether fiber jumpers are bent seriously or bundled too tightly. – If the attenuation of line fibers is excessive, recommend customers to rectify the line fibers or add an REG station to ensure that the actual line attenuation is smaller than the line attenuation specified in the design document. TIP
At the site, you can also use the following methods to determine whether the input optical power at an optical interface on a board meets the design requirement: l Use an optical power meter to measure the input optical power at an optical interface. Then, determine whether the input optical power is normal according to the permitted optical power range. l Check the status of the LED corresponding to this optical interface, such as IN, IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4, RM1, or RM2, on the front panel of the board. l Always on (red): indicates that the receive optical power is excessively low. l Blink (red): indicates that the receive optical power is excessively high. l Always on (green): indicates that the receive optical power is normal.
5.
Check the Output Power(dBm) value for each optical interface on the board. The value must be within the specified range. If the value for an optical interface is outside of the specified range, replace the optical module at the optical interface. For detailed specifications of a board, see the Hardware Description.
l
Operations on the T2000 1.
In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > Optical Power Management to display the Optical Power Management window.
2.
Select the desired board in the NE list on the left of the window, and then click . TIP
By selecting all the NEs on the network, you can query the optical power of all these NEs at a time.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
3.
On the right of the window, click Query. In the displayed dialog box, click Close.
4.
Optional: Customize the optical power management template as required. Right-click the title and then choose Setting from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, select the desired parameters. Display or hide the selected parameters as required. You can also change the position where a parameter is displayed and customize the width of the display field and the parameter name. For example, in the case of a network with no optical amplifier (OA) boards, you are recommended to hide the Pump Max Output Power(dBm) and Pump Min Output Power(dBm) fields. After the setting, click OK. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-97
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
TIP
After right-clicking the title, select a parameter directly to hide or display it as required.
5.
Set Reference Working Upper Threshold(dBm) and Reference Working Lower Threshold(dBm). The T2000 compares the obtained Input Power(dBm) with the Reference Working Upper Threshold(dBm) and Reference Working Lower Threshold(dBm) values to determine whether the input optical power is normal. If Input Power(dBm) is in the range of Reference Working Upper Threshold(dBm) and Reference Working Lower Threshold(dBm), the input optical power is normal. If the input optical power exceeds either of the preceding thresholds by less than 2 dB, the Input Power State field is displayed as warning alert; if the deviation is greater than 2 dB, the input power state is displayed as critical alert. The Reference Working Upper Threshold (dBm) and Reference Working Lower Threshold(dBm) fields have no default values. If either of them is not set, the T2000 does not check for the input power state. NOTE
If the Input Power Reference Value(dBm) field is set but the Reference Working Upper Threshold(dBm) and Reference Working Lower Threshold(dBm) fields are not set, the T2000 automatically generates Reference Working Upper Threshold(dBm) and Reference Working Lower Threshold(dBm) field values according to Input Power Reference Value (dBm). In this case, the following formulas must be satisfied: l Reference Working Upper Threshold(dBm) = Input Power Reference Value(dBm) + 3dB l Reference Working Lower Threshold(dBm) = Input Power Reference Value(dBm) 5dB To ensure that the T2000 displays a correct power state, you are recommended to set the Reference Working Upper Threshold(dBm) and Reference Working Lower Threshold (dBm) fields.
In the case of the OptiX OSN 1800, the Reference Working Upper Threshold (dBm) and Input Power Upper Threshold(dBm) fields have the same value, and the Reference Working Lower Threshold(dBm) and Input Power Lower Threshold(dBm) fields have the same value. 6.
5-98
Check the value of the Input Power State field. If the field is displayed as Critical Alert or Warning Alert, it indicates that the optical power of the specified optical interface is outside of the normal range. In this case, proceed to analyze the problem. That is, rectify this problem in the same way as used to rectify such a problem by using the Web LCT.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
TIP
You can also compare Input Power(dBm) of each optical interface with Input Power Lower Threshold(dBm) and Input Power Upper Threshold(dBm). If the input optical power is outside of the range of Input Power Lower Threshold(dBm) and Input Power Upper Threshold(dBm), it indicates that the input optical power is abnormal.
7.
Set Output Power Reference Value(dBm). Output Power Reference Value(dBm) must be set according to the output optical power specification of the optical module at the specified optical interface. The T2000 compares the obtained Output Power(dBm) with the preset Output Power Reference Value(dBm) to determine whether the output optical power is abnormal. If Output Power(dBm) deviates from Output Power Reference Value(dBm) by less than 2 dB, the T2000 displays Output Power State as normal; if the deviation is 2 dB to 4 dB, the T2000 displays Output Power State as Warning Alert; if the deviation is greater than 4 dB, the T2000 displays Output Power State as Critical Alert.
8.
Check Output Power(dBm) for each optical interface on the board according to the value of Output Power State. The output optical power must be within the specified range. If the output optical power at an optical interface is outside of the specified range, replace the optical module at the optical interface. NOTE
Whether Output Power State is correct depends on an appropriate setting of the Output Power Reference Value(dBm). Thus, during the commissioning, set Output Power Reference Value(dBm) properly according to the specification of the board and determine whether the output optical power is normal.
9.
After customizing the optical power management template, save the template. In future, you can apply the template directly instead of re-setting parameters. To save the customized template, choose Filter by Template > Save As. In the displayed dialog box, enter the template name and then click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
----End
Reference Information
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Clas sific ation
Item
Description
FAQ
The receive optical power is normal but the LDGF board reports an OTU1_LOF alarm.
In the case of a board with the dual fed and selective receiving function, if only optical interface 2 or 4 is in normal state before the board is configured with protection, the ESC communication will be unavailable.
The receive optical power is normal but the LDGF board reports a LINK_ERR alarm.
If an FE interface on the LDGF board does not access any service and the channel use status is set as used, the board will report a LINK_ERR alarm.
The receive optical power is normal but an OTU board reports an REM_SF alarm.
If the OTU board at the remote end does not access any service on the client side, the OTU board at the local end will report an REM_SF alarm.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-99
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Clas sific ation
Item
Description
(Opti onal) Asso ciate d opera tion
Commission optical power
If a query operation shows that the optical power is abnormal, you may need to commission the optical power at the site. In this case, see this section to learn the method and procedure for commissioning optical power.
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5.19 Querying Bit Errors Before and After FEC The count of bit errors before and after FEC is a key specification for measuring the system operation quality.
Prerequisite The performance monitoring function must be enabled and the current NE time must be within the specified performance monitoring time range. FEC Working State of an OTU board must be set to Enabled.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Precautions
CAUTION During the deployment commissioning, ensure that the bit errors before FEC meet the customer requirements and the bit errors after FEC is zero by taking into account the line attenuation and the configurations.
Procedure l
5-100
Operations on the Web LCT 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.
2.
Choose Performance > Current Performance from the Function Tree. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
l
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
3.
In Performance Event Type, select the desired item and then click Query.
4.
View the current values in Performance Event and Performance Value.
Operations on the T2000 Regardless of whether the deployment commissioning is performed by using the T2000 or Web LCT, the requirements on the bit errors before and after FEC are the same. 1.
In the Main Menu, choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance. Then, in the displayed window click the Current Performance Data tab.
2.
In Monitored Object Filter Condition, select All, and then in the Monitor Period field select 15-Minute or 24-Hour.
3.
In the Navigation Tree, select one or more NEs, and then click
4.
Click the Count tab. In Performance Event Type, click Select All.
5.
Click Query, and the Query Current Performance Data dialog box is displayed showing the query progress.
6.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
.
----End
Reference Information
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Clas sific ation
Item
Description
(Opti onal) Asso ciate d opera tions on the Web LCT
Set performance thresholds for a specified board
When an NE detects that a certain performance value exceeds the specified threshold, the NE reports a corresponding performance event. See this section to learn how to change a performance threshold of a specified board.
Set performance monitoring parameters of a board
The Web LCT/T2000 can monitor the performance of all boards on a network. The automatic reporting of detected performance values, however, is disabled by default. You can change the default setting as required.
Set performance monitoring parameters of an NE
Set the performance monitoring parameters of a specified NE properly and then enable the NE performance monitoring function. By doing so, you can obtain detailed description of performance records during the operation of the NE. This facilitates monitoring of the existing services and the equipment status.
Reset the performance register of a board
After a network test or fault recovery, you need to reset the performance register of a board as required before the board is put into operation. This is to start a new performance monitoring period.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-101
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5.20 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms Viewing the current alarms on an NE helps you to intuitively and quickly locate an exception on the network. This helps you to identify a fault on the network.
Prerequisite The NMS computer must communicate with the NE properly.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000. When you need to view alarms on all NEs on the network, use the T2000.
Procedure l
Operations on the Web LCT 1.
In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and choose Alarm > Browse Alarms from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, click the Browse Current Alarms tab.
2.
Analyze and handle the reported abnormal alarms. In the case of on-site maintenance, handle Critical and Major alarms before handling other abnormal alarms. Analyze and handle alarms one by one according to the network situations. According to network conditions, certain alarms are reported inevitably, whereas certain alarms cannot be reported. For example, in general no service is accessed on the WDM side during deployment commissioning. In this case, relevant alarms are reported inevitably. These alarms, however, are cleared automatically after real services are accessed on the client side. In the commissioning and configuration phases of deployment, you need to analyze every reported alarm. In general, focus on the following alarms: – Optical power low or high alarm – Temperature threshold-crossing alarm – Abnormal communication alarm – Bit error-related alarm – Abnormal service alarm To handle a reported alarm, see the Alarms and Performance Events Reference.
l
Operations on the T2000 1.
5-102
Click the critical alarm indicator view all the current critical alarms.
(red) on the upper right of the window to
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
NOTE
The figure in the middle of the indicator displays the number of the current critical alarms on the entire network. When the alarm indicator is circled with a rectangle (see indicates that there are critical alarms left unconfirmed.
2.
), it
Optional: Do as follows to display only the current alarms. On the lower left of the list, choose Filter by Template > New to create an alarm filter template. (1) In the Add Template dialog box, enter the template name in the Template name field and then click Next. (2) On the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tab pages, set alarm filtering conditions. (3) Click Finish. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes. NOTE
You can create multiple alarm filter templates as required. Thus, you can filter out unnecessary alarms directly next time by selecting an appropriate alarm filter template. To select an alarm filter template, click Template in the window and then select the template name.
3.
Click the major alarm indicator view all the current major alarms.
(orange) on the upper right of the window to
NOTE
The figure in the middle of the indicator displays the number of the current major alarms on the entire network. When the alarm indicator is circled with a rectangle (see indicates that there are major alarms left unconfirmed.
4.
Click the minor alarm indicator view all the current minor alarms.
), it
(yellow) on the upper right of the window to
NOTE
The figure in the middle of the indicator displays the number of the current minor alarms on the entire network. When the alarm indicator is circled with a rectangle (see indicates that there are minor alarms left unconfirmed.
), it
TIP
In addition to the preceding navigation path to viewing current alarms, you can also choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm in the Main Menu. Then, in the displayed Filter dialog box, set the alarm filter conditions on the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tab page.
5.
Analyze and handle the reported abnormal alarms. For details, see the description of the methods for analyzing and handling alarms by using the Web LCT.
----End
Reference Information
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Clas sific ation
Item
Description
FAQ
The optical path is reachable but the NE cannot be logged in to remotely.
In the case of a board with the dual fed and selective receiving function, if only optical interface 2 or 4 is in normal state before the board is configured with protection, the ESC communication will be unavailable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-103
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Clas sific ation
Item
Description
(Opti onal) Asso ciate d opera tion
Commission optical power
If a query operation shows that the optical power is abnormal, you may need to commission the optical power at the site. In this case, read this section to learn the method and procedure for commissioning optical power.
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5.21 Testing Protection Switching In the commissioning or configuration phase, you can run a manual switching command to check whether protection switching can be performed normally. 5.21.1 Testing SW SNCP Switching After configuring SW SNCP protection, you can run a manual switching command to check whether the SW SNCP switching can be performed successfully. 5.21.2 Testing Port Protection Switching In the case of intra-board 1+1 protection, optical line protection, client-side 1+1 protection, and inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel protection, you can run a manual switching command in a same user interface.
5.21.1 Testing SW SNCP Switching After configuring SW SNCP protection, you can run a manual switching command to check whether the SW SNCP switching can be performed successfully.
Prerequisite The NMS computer must communicate with the NE properly. Protection groups must be configured correctly. The working and protection channels of a protection group on the network must be in normal state.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
5-104
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Precautions
CAUTION In the case of revertive protection, services can be switched only to the protection channel by performing a manual switching.
Procedure l
Operations on the Web LCT 1.
In the NE list, select the NE where an SW SNCP protection group is configured. Rightclick the NE and then choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu to display the NE Explorer window.
2.
Choose Configuration > Subwavelength SNCP Service from the Function Tree.
3.
Click Query to view the values of the Channel Status and Revertive Mode fields of the working and protection cross-connections of all the existing SW SNCP protection groups on the NE. Regardless of the working or protection cross-connections, the value of the Channel Status field should be Normal. NOTE
If the value of the Channel Status field of a working or protection cross-connection is not Normal, check whether the channel corresponding to this cross-connection is in normal state. Proceed with the protection switching test after rectifying the fault.
4.
Right-click the desired protection group and choose Manual to Working channel or Manual to Protection channel. Observe the changes in parameter values and determine whether protection switching can be performed successfully. When Revertive Mode of the protection group is set to Non-Revertive: – After you choose Manual to Protection Channel from the right-click menu, the protection switching should be performed successfully and the working crossconnection becomes the protection cross-connection. – After you choose Manual to Working Channel from the right-click menu, the protection switching should be performed successfully and the protection crossconnection becomes the work cross-connection. When Revertive Mode of the protection group is set to Revertive: – After you choose Manual to Protection Channel from the right-click menu, the protection switching should be performed successfully and the working crossconnection becomes the protection cross-connection. After the time specified in the WTR Time (s) field elapses, the protection cross-connection of the protection group automatically restores to the working cross-connection.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-105
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network NOTE
If the protection switching fails or an exception occurs in the protection switching process after you run a manual switching command, check whether the channel corresponding to the working or protection cross-connection is in normal state, and whether the protection group and the working and protection cross-connections are configured properly. Proceed with the protection switching test after removing the fault.
l
Operations on the T2000 1.
Select the NE where the SW SNCP protection group is configured. In the NE Explorer window of this NE, choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. In the displayed window, click the SNCP Service Control tab.
2.
Click Query to view the status of all the existing protection groups on the NE. Click Function to display a drop-down list. Then, run manual switching commands on each protection group in turn to determine whether protection switching can be performed successfully for the protection group. The operations and precautions are the same as those when the protection switching test is performed by using the Web LCT.
----End
Reference Information Clas sific ation
Item
Description
(Opti onal) Asso ciate d opera tions on the Web LCT
Delete a crossconnection
See this section to learn how to delete a cross-connection.
Convert a service with SNCP protection into a service with no protection
A service with SNCP protection can be converted into a service with no protection.
Para meter descr iption
WDM crossconnection configuration
See this section to learn how to set the parameters used for configuring a WDM cross-connection.
SNCP service control
See this section to learn how to set the parameters for controlling services with SNCP protection.
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5-106
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
5.21.2 Testing Port Protection Switching In the case of intra-board 1+1 protection, optical line protection, client-side 1+1 protection, and inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel protection, you can run a manual switching command in a same user interface.
Prerequisite The NMS computer must communicate with the NE properly. Protection groups must be configured correctly. The working and protection channels of a port protection group on the network must be in normal state.
Tools, Meters, and Materials Web LCT or T2000
Precautions
CAUTION In the case of revertive protection, services can be switched only to the protection channel by performing a manual switching.
Procedure l
Operations on the Web LCT 1.
In the NE list, select the NE where a port protection group is configured. Right-click the NE and then choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu to display the NE Explorer window.
2.
Choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree.
3.
Click Query to view the values of the Current Channel, Working Channel Status, and Protection Channel Status fields of all the existing protection groups on the NE. The values of the Working Channel Status and Protection Channel Status fields should be Normal. NOTE
If the value of the Working Channel Status or Protection Channel Status is not Normal, check the working or protection channel. Proceed with the protection switching test after removing the fault.
4.
Right-click the desired protection group and choose Manual to Working channel or Manual to Protection channel. Observe the changes in parameter values and determine whether protection switching can be performed successfully. When Revertive Mode of the protection group is set to Non-Revertive:
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-107
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
– If Current Channel of the protection group is set to Work, select Manual to Protection channel from the right-click menu. If the manual switching is successful, the value of Current Channel changes to Protection. Later, choose Clear Switching from the right-click menu to clear the current protection setting. After that, choose Manual to Working channel from the right-click menu. If the manual switching is successful, the value of Current Channel changes to Work. – If Current Channel of the protection group is set to Protection, select Manual to Working channel from the right-click menu. If the manual switching is successful, the value of Current Channel changes to Work. Later, choose Clear Switching from the right-click menu to clear the current protection setting. After that, choose Manual to Protection channel from the right-click menu. If the manual switching is successful, the value of Current Channel changes to Protection. When Revertive Mode of the protection group is set to Revertive: – If Current Channel of the protection group is set to Work, choose Manual to Protection channel from the right-click menu. If the manual switching is successful, the value of Current Channel changes to Protection. After the time specified in the WTR Time (s) field elapses, the value of Current Channel automatically restores to Work. – If Current Channel is set to Protection, the value of Current Channel automatically restores to Work after the time specified in the WTR Time (s) field elapses. NOTE
If the protection switching fails or an exception occurs in the protection switching process after you run a manual switching command, check whether the protection or working channel is in normal state, and whether the protection group configuration is correct. Proceed with the protection switching test after removing the fault.
l
Operations on the T2000 1.
In the NE Explorer window of the NE where a port protection group is configured, choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Query to view the status of all the existing protection groups on the NE. Then, run manual switching commands on each protection group in turn to determine whether protection switching can be performed successfully for the protection group. The operations and precautions are the same as those when the protection switching test is performed by using the Web LCT.
----End
Reference Information
5-108
Clas sific ation
Item
Description
Para meter descr iption
Port protection
See this section to learn how to set the parameters for configuring port protection.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5.22 Querying and Saving the Networkwide Optical Power and Alarm Data After commissioning a network, you need to query and save the optical power and alarm data of the entire network. This type of data can help you analyze and understand the operating status of the network in future.
Prerequisite The performance monitoring function must be enabled. Fiber connections must be established properly and lasers must be enabled.
Tools, Meters, and Materials The T2000 must be used for querying the optical power and alarms of the entire network.
Procedure l
Operations on the T2000 1.
In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > Optical Power Management to display the Optical Power Management window.
2.
Optional: If an optical power management template has already been customized, you can use this template to filter out unnecessary optical power managed objects. To invoke this template, do as follows. Choose Filter by Template > Apply. In the displayed dialog box, select the required template. Then, click Apply.
3.
In the NE list on the left of the window, click
4.
In the pane on the right of the window, click Query. In the displayed dialog box, click Close.
5.
Check the optical power on the entire network and ensure that the optical power of all the equipment on the network is proper.
6.
Optional: Set the current optical power of the entire network to this reference value. This will facilitate future maintenance of the network. Click Reset Networkwide Reference Value. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
.
TIP
After all the commissioning and configuration tasks are performed during deployment, the optical power of the network obtained at the time when the network starts working is the reference value indicating the optimal performance of the network.
7.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Click Save As. Select the path for saving the optical power report and enter the name for this report. After that, click Save. At this point, the optical power data of the entire network is saved on the specified path. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-109
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
8.
In the Main Menu, choose Fault > Browse Current Alarms. In the displayed Filter window, set the alarm filter conditions on the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tab pages. Click OK. NOTE
To save all the data of the current alarms, ensure that all the alarms can be displayed properly when setting alarm filter conditions.
9.
Click Synchronize. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close to synchronize the alarm data on the NE with that on the NMS.
10. Click Save As. Select the path for saving the alarm data and enter the file name. After that, click OK. At this point, the data of the current alarms is saved on the specified path. ----End
Reference Information Clas sific ation
Item
Description
(Opti onal) Asso ciate d opera tions
Check optical power of boards
If the obtained optical power is outside of the normal range, see this section to learn how to rectify a problem with abnormal optical power.
Query current alarms on an NE and remove abnormal alarms
If a query of alarms shows that abnormal alarms are generated at that time on the network, see this section to learn how to handle an abnormal alarm.
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5.23 Backing Up NE Data to the NMS Server or Client You can manually back up the data of one or more NEs of the same type to an NMS server or client.
Prerequisite The path for saving the backup data and the TFTP/FTP/SFTP server must be configured and the TFTP/FTP/SFTP service must be started.
Tools, Meters, and Materials The T2000 must be used when you back up NE data to an NMS server or client.
5-110
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
Precautions NOTE
Observe the following precautions when backing up NE data to an NMS server or client: l The backup operation can be performed to multiple NEs at the same time if these NEs are of the same type. l If you select a node of a certain NE type in the Navigation Tree, the Device View tab page displays the information and version information of all the NEs of this type. l The Backup Information tab page displays the information of the backup file.
Procedure l
Operations on the T2000 1.
In the Main Menu, choose Data Center > Device Operation. The Device View list is displayed.
2.
In the Device View list, right-click the NE whose data you want to back up and then choose Backup from the shortcut menu. The Backup dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
When multiple NEs are selected, the Basic Information tab is unavailable.
3.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Select NMS Server or NMS Client to back up the data of the selected NE to the NMS server or client.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-111
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Commissioning and Configuring the Network
NOTE
NMS Server is selected by default. If you select NMS Client, the data of the selected NE is backed up to the NMS client.
4.
Optional: If you select NMS Server, you also need to click for saving the backup NE data.
5.
Click Start, and then the Device View page displays the backup progress. In this case, wait until the data of the selected NE is backed up.
to select the path
----End
Reference Information Clas sific ation
Item
Description
(Opti onal) Asso ciate d opera tions on the T200 0
Compare the methods of backing up and restoring NE data
The backup or restored NE database can be saved on the SCC board, NMS server, or NMS client. Different storage locations determine different backup and restoration methods.
Restore NE data from the NMS server or client
After backing up NE data to the NMS server or client, you can see this section to learn how to restore NE data from the NMS server or client.
Postrequisite See List of Tasks for Commissioning and Configuration During Deployment for the subsequent task.
5-112
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
A
A Handling Common Commissioning Problems
Handling Common Commissioning Problems
This chapter describes the methods of analyzing and handling the most common problems happening in the deployment process. You need to analyze and handle problems according to actual situations. In the commissioning or configuration phase of deployment, alarms are generally generated when a problem happens. For example, alarms are generated if no service is received on the client side or if the configuration is incomplete. You need to analyze each alarm reported by equipment to determine which alarms do not reflect abnormal running status and which alarms indicate running status in the current engineering conditions. Abnormal alarms must be handled properly in the commissioning or configuration phase of deployment. Equipment may report various alarms. Different alarms have different causes. This chapter describes the common causes of the common alarms and the common methods of handling such alarms generated during deployment. There may be other causes of such alarms. Thus, analyze and handle alarms in the commissioning or configuration phase of deployment according to actual situations. For details on how to handle alarms of the OptiX OSN 1800, see the Alarms and Performance Events Reference. When reporting an alarm, the NMS also displays the position where the alarm is generated. Determine the slot, board name, and optical interface where the alarm is generated according to the displayed position information. For example, 1-LDGF2-201(LP1/LP1)-OTU1:1. In the case of the LDGF2 board, 201(LP1/LP1) indicates the IN1 and IN2 optical interfaces, and 202(LP2/ LP2) indicates the IN3 and IN4 optical interfaces. The digit 1 at the end of the position information indicates the IN1 or IN3 optical interface. If the digit is 2, it indicates the IN2 or IN4 optical interface. That is, 1-LDGF2-201(LP1/LP1)-OTU1:1 indicates that the alarm is generated at the IN1 optical interface on the LDGF2 board in slot 1. The indication of the position information for other boards is similar. A.1 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LDGF Board Reports an OTU1_LOF Alarm A.2 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LDGF Board Reports a LINK_ERR Alarm A.3 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LWX2 Board Reports the R_LOC Alarm A.4 The Receive Optical Power is Normal But an OTU Board Reports an REM_SF Alarm A.5 The Optical Path Is Reachable But the NE Cannot Be Logged in Remotely
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-1
A Handling Common Commissioning Problems
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
A.1 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LDGF Board Reports an OTU1_LOF Alarm Keywords LDGF, OTU1_LOF, LWX2 regeneration board
Symptom The receive optical power on the WDM side of the LDGF board is normal but the board reports an OTU1_LOF alarm. The LDGF board that reports an OTU1_LOF alarm works with the LWX2 regeneration board. Figure A-1 shows the network where the LDGF and LWX2 board are used. The ALS function of a laser on the LWX2 regeneration board is disabled and all lasers on this board are enabled. As shown in Figure A-1, the optical cable between the two LWX2 regeneration boards is unavailable. That is, the optical path between the two regeneration boards is absent. Thus, the downstream LWX2 regeneration board reports an R_LOS alarm. Figure A-1 LDGF board networking mode
IN1
OUT1 L D G F IN1 2
L W X 2
L W X 2
L D G OUT1 F
Cause Analysis The receive optical power on the WDM side of the LDGF board is normal but the board reports an OTU1_LOF alarm. This indicates that the frame structure of the received optical signals is invalid or the board is faulty. In general, the probability that the board is faulty is very small. Thus, you can first check whether the received optical signals are normal. As described previously, the upstream optical path is unavailable, and thus the downstream LWX2 regeneration board cannot receive valid optical signals. The lasers on the downstream LWX2 regeneration board, however, are forcibly enabled. Thus, the downstream LWX2 regeneration board transmits white light signals that have no frame structure. Thus, although optical power of the optical signals received by the LDGF, the LDGF board reports an OTU1_LOF alarm because the received optical signals have no frame structure. A-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
A Handling Common Commissioning Problems
Procedure After an analysis, this is normal for the LDGF board to an OTU1_LOF alarm in the current engineering situation. When the optical cable between the two LWX2 regeneration boards is installed and the optical path between them are present, the OTU1_LOF alarm will be cleared automatically.
Reference Information None.
A.2 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LDGF Board Reports a LINK_ERR Alarm Keywords LDGF, LINK_ERR
Symptom The receive optical power on the WDM side of the LDGF board is normal, the ETH port, however, reports the LINK_ERR alarm. No service gains access to the ETH port on the LDGF board where the alarm is reported.
Cause Analysis The LINK_ERR alarm indicates that valid links between two data ports fail to be established, however, the receive optical power on the WDM side of the LDGF board is normal and the line is normal. No service gains access to the ETH port on the LDGF board, and therefore valid links fail to be established and the LINK_ERR alarm is reported.
Procedure Under the current engineering condition, the situation is normal. 1.
If the ETH port on the LDGF board is planned to access services in the network planning, the alarm is cleared automatically after the ETH port accesses services normally.
2.
If the ETH port on the LDGF board is not planned to access services in the network planning, set the ETH channel to unused so that the channel does not detect the alarms that are irrelevant with normal network operation.
Reference Information None.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-3
A Handling Common Commissioning Problems
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
A.3 The Receive Optical Power Is Normal But the LWX2 Board Reports the R_LOC Alarm Keywords LWX2, R_LOC, interconnected equipment
Symptom The client side of the LWX2 board interconnects with the client equipment to access the STM-16 service. The optical interface of the client equipment reports the R_LOS alarm, the client side of the LWX2 board and the corresponding WDM side report the R_LOC alarm, and the service is unavailable.
Cause Analysis Check the optical power. The result shows that the receive optical power values on the client equipment and the client and WDM sides of LWX2 board are normal. Query the WDM interface attributes of the LWX2 board to check whether the board configuration is correct. The result shows that the service rates on the client and WDM sides of the LWX2 board are set to 2488.3 Mbit/s and 2667.0 Mbit/s respectively. Because the LWX2 board is a service transparent transmission board, the service rates on the client and WDM sides of the LWX2 board must be the same as the rate of the service that is actually accessed. Otherwise, the R_LOC alarm is reported and the service is unavailable.
Procedure The R_LOC alarm is reported because the service rate on the WDM side of the LWX2 board is different from the actual service rate. Change the service rate on the WDM side of the board to 2488.3 Mbit/s, and the symptom disappears and the service is available.
Reference Information Regardless of whether the LWX2 board is used as a service transparent transmission board or a regeneration board, the service rates on the client and WDM sides of the board must be the same as the rate of the service that is actually accessed. Otherwise, the service is unavailable.
A.4 The Receive Optical Power is Normal But an OTU Board Reports an REM_SF Alarm Keywords OTU, REM_SF, client-side service A-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
A Handling Common Commissioning Problems
Symptom As shown in Figure A-2, the receive optical power of the OTU board is normal but the client side of the OTU board at station A reports the REM_SF alarm. Figure A-2 Schematic diagram of the OTU board reporting the REM_SF alarm RX
TX
IN1
TX
O T OUT1 U
RX
OUT1 O T U IN1
A
B
Cause Analysis The REM_SF alarm indicates that the receive signals on the client side of the OTU board at the opposite station fail. At the deployment commissioning phase, no service gains access to the client side of the OTU board at station B, and therefore the alarm is reported.
Procedure After services gain access to the client side of the OTU board at station B, the alarm is cleared.
Reference Information None.
A.5 The Optical Path Is Reachable But the NE Cannot Be Logged in Remotely Keywords LDGF2, NE unreachable, remote login
Symptom The communication between stations A and B is achieved through only the ESC provided by the LDGF2 board. Because the optical fibers are not connected at the deployment commissioning phase, the optical paths of IN1/OUT1 on the LDGF2 board are unavailable. The optical paths of IN2/OUT2, however, are normal. See Figure A-3. Station B cannot be logged in remotely at station A. Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-5
A Handling Common Commissioning Problems
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Figure A-3 Schematic diagram of the network of the LDGF2 board IN1
OUT1 L D IN1 G F OUT2 2
L D OUT1 G IN2 F 2 OUT2
IN2
B
A
Cause Analysis The LDGF2 board receives ESC overhead bytes through the channels of IN1/OUT1. The optical paths of IN1/OUT1 on the LDGF2 board are unavailable. Therefore, the ESC overhead bytes fail to be received, communication between NEs fails to be established, and the NE fails to be logged in remotely.
Procedure Under the current engineering condition, establish normal communication routes according to the network planning: l
Configure intra-board 1+1 protection on the LDGF2 boards at stations A and B respectively to establish normal communication between the two stations by using the channels of IN2/ OUT2.
l
Restore the fiber connections.
Reference Information In the case of the OTU boards with the dual fed and selective receiving function, before the protection is configured, overhead bytes are received through only the channels of IN1/OUT1 or IN3/OUT3. If the optical paths of IN1/OUT1 or IN3/OUT3 are unavailable, the ESC communication fails even if the optical paths of IN2/OUT2 or IN4/OUT4 are normal. After the protection is configured, the ESC communication is normal even if only one channel is normal.
A-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
B
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
Reference Operations for the
Commissioning and Configuration This chapter lists the reference operations for the commissioning and configuration. You can perform proper operations according to the network condition. B.1 Obtaining NE IP Addresses at the Site In the case of onsite commissioning, if the T2000 or Web LCT is unavailable, you can obtain the IP address of an NE by running a command directly in the Windows operating system. B.2 Creating a Single NE Creating NEs one by one is not as quick and precise as the batch creation. However, creating NEs one by one is applicable no matter what way of communication an NE adopts. The NEs that use serial ports to communicate do not support the NE search function and you must create them one by one. B.3 Checking the NE Software Version This topic describes how to check the NE software version. B.4 Creating an NE User To ensure NE data security, only the users with NE user authority can log in to the NEs. An NE user is able to perform operations on the NEs according to the assigned authority. The Web LCT administrator is advised to create NE users before configuring services. B.5 Switching a Logged-In NE User During a new deployment, after the lct NE user creates an NE, this user can create another NE user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name. B.6 Modifying the Optical NE Name You can change the optical NE name at any time as required with no effect on the running of the NE. B.7 Modifying GNE Parameters During the network optimization and adjustment, you may need to change the GNE type or modify the communication address. B.8 Changing the GNE for NEs When the GNE that the non-gateway NE belongs to is changed and this non-gateway NE does not belong to another GNE, you need to change the GNE to maintain the communication between the NEs and the T2000. When the number of NEs managed by a certain GNE exceeds a certain number (the number is usually 50 and varies depending on different types of equipment), change Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-1
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
the GNE for certain NEs so that the communication between the T2000 and the NEs is not affected. B.9 Deleting an NE When you need to adjust the network topology or have created a wrong NE, you can delete the NE from the Web LCT. Deleting an NE removes all information of the NE from the Web LCT but does not affect the running of the equipment. B.10 Enabling the Proxy ARP The address resolution protocol (ARP) helps you to query the MAC address of the destination equipment using its IP address. If you enable proxy ARP for a gateway NE, the gateway NE can answer ARP requests for other non-gateway NEs, so that you can set IP addresses of NEs of the same network in the same network segment. B.11 Configuring Static Routing If the NE adopts IP over DCC and direction communication connection mode, you need to configure a static route between the NM computer and the NE. B.12 Querying the OSPF Protocol Status Enable the OSPF protocol so that the routing information on the gateway NE can be automatically diffused to other NEs. B.13 Configuring the NE Data Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE first so that the T2000 can manage and operate the NE. B.14 Configuring Boards In the NE Panel, you can add a board and set port attributes for the board. B.15 Performance Management To ensure the normal functioning of the network, the network management and maintenance personnel should periodically check and monitor the network by taking proper performance management measures. B.16 Modifying the Services Configuration After a service is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the service based on the following task sets. B.17 Switching the Working Mode of the LQM2 The default working mode of the LQM2 board is 2LQM Mode. When the working mode is switched to AP8 Mode, you need to configure the board and add the IN2/OUT2 optical interface according to this section. B.18 Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data For the security of the NE data, you can back up and restore the NE data. B.19 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode In Fiber/Cable Management, you can manage the fiber connections between NEs and inside NEs in a unified manner. Compared with the graphic mode, the creating fiber connections in the list mode is not visual. Hence, the list mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a few fiber connections only. B.20 Configuring Services by Creating WDM Trails You can configure services on NEs by creating OCh, ODUk, or client trails. To create an OCh, ODUk, or client trail, you need to search for or create the information about the trail at the corresponding server layer and then specify the source and sink of the OCh, ODUk, or client trail.
B-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
B.1 Obtaining NE IP Addresses at the Site In the case of onsite commissioning, if the T2000 or Web LCT is unavailable, you can obtain the IP address of an NE by running a command directly in the Windows operating system.
Prerequisite The NMS computer must run on Windows and must be connected to the NE directly by using an Ethernet cable.
Tools, Meters, and Materials None.
Background Information You can use the LAMP button on the SCC board to restore the default IP address of the equipment on site. Press the LAMP button on the SCC board and hold it for five to ten seconds. Then, release the button and wait for five to ten seconds. Press the button again and hold it for five to ten seconds. Then, release the button and wait for five to ten seconds. Press the button for the third time and hold it for more than five seconds, and then release the button. In this manner, the IP address of the equipment can be restored. NOTE
The default IP address is 129.9.191.240.
Procedure Step 1 Set the IP address of the NMS computer to ensure that the NMS computer is located on the 129.9 network segment. For example, set the IP address to 129.9.0.254. Step 2 On the Windows, choose Start > Run and then enter cmd in the command line interface to enter the DOS system. In the DOS system, enter ping 129.9.255.255. Step 3 When the timeout response is complete, enter arp -a. Step 4 The IP address of the NE is displayed in the Internet Address column.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-3
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
----End
B.2 Creating a Single NE Creating NEs one by one is not as quick and precise as the batch creation. However, creating NEs one by one is applicable no matter what way of communication an NE adopts. The NEs that use serial ports to communicate do not support the NE search function and you must create them one by one.
Procedure Step 1 Click Add NE in the NE list. The Add NE dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Enter an NE ID and an Extended ID. Step 3 Select Gateway Type and set related parameters. l If the gateway type is IP Gateway, set IP Address and Port.
l If the gateway type is Serial Port, set Port and Baud Rate.
B-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
NOTE
The range of ID is from 1 to 49135.
Step 4 Enter the User Name and the Password. The default NE user is lct and the default password is password. Step 5 Click OK. One entry is added in the NE list. Usually the NE communicates normally and is in the Logged In state. ----End
Postrequisite After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows: l
The communication between the T2000 and the NE is abnormal. Check the settings of communication parameters, such as the IP address of the NE and NE ID.
l
The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user.
l
The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE user.
B.3 Checking the NE Software Version This topic describes how to check the NE software version.
Background Information The NE software version refers to the version of the SCC board of the NE. NOTE
The SCC board refers to the system control and communication unit. The SCC board interoperates with the T2000 to manage the boards of the equipment and realize the communication between the equipment.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE List, double-click the desired NE. The NE panel is displayed. Step 2 Right-click the SCC board and then choose SCC Version from the shortcut menu.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-5
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Step 3 In the Prompt dialog box, view the NE software version. Step 4 Click OK. ----End
B.4 Creating an NE User To ensure NE data security, only the users with NE user authority can log in to the NEs. An NE user is able to perform operations on the NEs according to the assigned authority. The Web LCT administrator is advised to create NE users before configuring services.
Prerequisite You must log in the NE to create an NE user.
Context The default NE user has the monitor level authority. To ensure NE data security, it is recommended that you assign NE users with different authorities as required. Refer to Parameters: NE User Management.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click and the Add NE User dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Enter the NE user name in the field. NOTE
The NE user name must contain letters, or it can be a combination of letters, symbols and numerals. The NE user name contains at least 4, but not more than 16 characters.
Step 4 Select the as needed. Step 5 Enter the password in the New Password field and enter it again in the Confirm Password field. B-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
NOTE
The password is a string of 6-16 characters. It can consist of letters, symbols and numerals, and must contain at least one letter and one numeral.
Step 6 Click OK. ----End
B.5 Switching a Logged-In NE User During a new deployment, after the lct NE user creates an NE, this user can create another NE user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name.
Prerequisite The NE user must be created.
Background Information An NE user cannot log in to or manage an NE at multiple clients at the same time. After you use an NE user to log in to an NE through a T2000 server, if you use the same NE user to log in to the same NE through another T2000 server, the NE user is forced to log out from the first T2000 server.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE List, select one or more NEs that are logged in and click NE Logout. The NE status becomes Not Logged In. Step 2 Click NE Login. The NE Login dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Enter the User Name and the Password. Step 4 Click OK. In the NE List, the Login Status changes to Logged In. ----End
B.6 Modifying the Optical NE Name You can change the optical NE name at any time as required with no effect on the running of the NE.
Procedure Step 1 Right-click an optical NE on the Main Topology and choose Attribute from the shortcut menu. The NE Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Enter the new optical NE name and click OK. NOTE
An Optical NE name can contain a maximum of 64 letters, symbols, and numerals, but cannot contain the following special characters: | : * ? " < >.
----End Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-7
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
B.7 Modifying GNE Parameters During the network optimization and adjustment, you may need to change the GNE type or modify the communication address.
Precautions
CAUTION This is a potential service affecting operation. Specifically, it may interrupt the communication between a GNE and the T2000, and the communication between the GNE and the non-gateway NEs that are managed by the GNE.
Procedure Step 1 Choose System > DCN Management from the Main Menu. Click the GNE tab. Step 2 Select the GNE to be modified, right-click and choose Modify GNE from the shortcut menu. Step 3 In the Modify GNE dialog box displayed, set Gateway Type the parameters.
NOTE
l It is not recommended to modify the Port No.. l Make sure that the IP address of the GNE is in the same network segment as the IP address of the T2000. When the T2000 server and the GNE are in different network segments, you need to set the network port attributes of the router through which the T2000 server and the GNE are connected. In this way, the T2000 can log in to the GNE.
Step 4 Click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close. ----End
B.8 Changing the GNE for NEs When the GNE that the non-gateway NE belongs to is changed and this non-gateway NE does not belong to another GNE, you need to change the GNE to maintain the communication between the NEs and the T2000. When the number of NEs managed by a certain GNE exceeds a certain B-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
number (the number is usually 50 and varies depending on different types of equipment), change the GNE for certain NEs so that the communication between the T2000 and the NEs is not affected.
Precautions
CAUTION This operation may interrupt the NE communication.
Procedure Step 1 Choose System > DCN Management from the Main Menu. Step 2 Click the NE tab. Step 3 Select an NE. Double-click the Primary GNE1 field and select a GNE from the drop-down list.
Step 4 Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. Step 5 Click Refresh. ----End
B.9 Deleting an NE When you need to adjust the network topology or have created a wrong NE, you can delete the NE from the Web LCT. Deleting an NE removes all information of the NE from the Web LCT but does not affect the running of the equipment.
Prerequisite Fibers and cables connected to the NE must be deleted.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE List, select the NE you wish to delete, and click Delete NE. Step 2 Click OK. ----End Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-9
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
B.10 Enabling the Proxy ARP The address resolution protocol (ARP) helps you to query the MAC address of the destination equipment using its IP address. If you enable proxy ARP for a gateway NE, the gateway NE can answer ARP requests for other non-gateway NEs, so that you can set IP addresses of NEs of the same network in the same network segment.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.
Background Information When the Web LCT and the gateway NE are directly connected through LAN and the IP addresses of the Web LCT and the gateway NE are in the same network segment, when the remote NEs connect to the gateway NE through fibers, and when the IP addresses of the remote NEs, the gateway NE, and the Web LCT are in the same subnet, there are requirements that the Web LCT accesses the NEs on the entire network through the gateway NE and the upper layer application requirement of accessing remote NEs based on the IP network layer. To meet the upper layer application requirement of accessing remote NEs based on the IP network layer, you need to enable the proxy ARP of the gateway NE.
Procedure Step 1 Select an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the Proxy ARP tab. Step 2 Optional: Click Query. Step 3 Double-click Value and select Disabled or Enabled from the drop-down list. Step 4 Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. ----End
Postrequisite After you enable proxy ARP, you need to create a static route for each NE.
B.11 Configuring Static Routing If the NE adopts IP over DCC and direction communication connection mode, you need to configure a static route between the NM computer and the NE.
Procedure Step 1 Select the desired NE from the object tree. Then choose Communication > IP Stack Protocol Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IP Route Management tab. Step 3 Click New. Configure the following parameters in the Create an IP Route dialog box. B-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
NOTE
l Destination Address: the IP address of the NE that requires communication l Subnet Mask: the network mask code of the subnet where an NE resides l Gateway IP: the IP address of the forwarding NE
Step 4 Click Apply. ----End
B.12 Querying the OSPF Protocol Status Enable the OSPF protocol so that the routing information on the gateway NE can be automatically diffused to other NEs.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.
Background Information The OSPF protocol is enabled by default.
Procedure Step 1 Select an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab. Step 2 Click Query to check if the OSPF protocol status is normal. ----End
Postrequisite If the OSPF protocol is incorrect, please contact Huawei engineers to adjust the OSPF protocol parameters used by the NEs.
B.13 Configuring the NE Data Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE first so that the T2000 can manage and operate the NE. B.13.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually By configuring NE data manually, you can configure the board slot information of an NE. B.13.2 Uploading the NE Data By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the network management system directly.
B.13.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually By configuring NE data manually, you can configure the board slot information of an NE. Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-11
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Prerequisite The NE must be created successfully.
Procedure Step 1 Right-click an unconfigured NE in the NE information list and choose Configuration from the shortcut menu. The NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Select Manual Configuration and click Next. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that manual configuration clears the data on the NE side. Step 3 Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that manual configuration interrupts the service on the NE. Step 4 Click OK. The Set NE Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Optional: If you need to modify the NE Attribute, set NE Name, Equipment Type, NE Remarks, and Subrack Type. Step 6 Click Next, and the NE slot window is displayed. Step 7 Optional: Click Query Logical Information to query the logical boards of the NE. Step 8 Optional: Click Query Physical Information to query the physical boards of the NE. Step 9 Optional: Right-click on the slot to add a board. Step 10 Click Next to display the Send Configuration window. Step 11 Select Verify and Run as required and click Finish. NOTE
Verification involves running the verification command. Click Finish to deliver the configuration to the NE and complete the basic configurations for the NE. After the verification is successful, the NE starts to work normally.
----End
B.13.2 Uploading the NE Data By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the network management system directly.
Prerequisite The NE must be created successfully.
Procedure Step 1 Right-click an unconfigured NE in the NE information list and choose Configuration from the shortcut menu. The NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Select Upload and click Next. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that the upload may take a long time. Step 3 Click OK to start the upload. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed when the uploading is complete. B-12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
Step 4 Click Close. ----End
B.14 Configuring Boards In the NE Panel, you can add a board and set port attributes for the board. B.14.1 Adding Boards When manually configuring the NE data, you need to add boards on the NE Panel. You can either add the physical boards that actually operate on the NE or add the logical boards that do not exist on the actual equipment. B.14.2 Deleting Boards To modify the network configuration or the NE configuration, you may need to delete the boards from the NE Panel.
B.14.1 Adding Boards When manually configuring the NE data, you need to add boards on the NE Panel. You can either add the physical boards that actually operate on the NE or add the logical boards that do not exist on the actual equipment.
Prerequisite l
The NE must be created.
l
There must be idle slot on the NE Panel.
Context The physical boards are the actual boards inserted in the subrack. A logical board refers to a board that is created on the T2000. After a logical board is created, you can configure the relevant services. If the corresponding physical board is online, the configured services can be available.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click Slot Layout. Step 2 Right-click the selected idle slot. Select the board you want to add from the drop-down list. NOTE
Click Add Physical Boards. All the slots in which physical boards are configured, and the system automatically creates corresponding logical boards.
----End
B.14.2 Deleting Boards To modify the network configuration or the NE configuration, you may need to delete the boards from the NE Panel.
Prerequisite The fibers, trails, services and protection groups must be deleted. Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-13
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click Slot Layout to select a subrack. Step 2 Right-click the board you want to delete and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. NOTE
Certain boards, such as PIU boards, cannot be deleted. The boards that can be deleted vary with different types of equipment. For details, see the Hardware Description of each type of the equipment.
----End
B.15 Performance Management To ensure the normal functioning of the network, the network management and maintenance personnel should periodically check and monitor the network by taking proper performance management measures. B.15.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold The NE reports an event when it detects that a performance value exceeds the specified threshold. According to the requirement, you can set different performance thresholds for a board. B.15.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a Board You can set the monitoring status and the automatic reporting status of monitored objects. The T2000 monitors all the performance of the board, but the automatic reporting feature is disabled by default. You can modify the value of the attribute according to the requirement. B.15.3 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performance monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running of the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed by maintenance personnel. B.15.4 Resetting Board Performance Registers After a network test or fault recovery but before the official operation, you need to reset the performance register so that the system enters a new performance monitoring period.
B.15.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold The NE reports an event when it detects that a performance value exceeds the specified threshold. According to the requirement, you can set different performance thresholds for a board.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a related board and choose Performance > Performance Threshold. Step 2 Set performance thresholds according to the requirement. Step 3 Optional: Click Default to restore the default settings. Step 4 Click Apply. ----End B-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
B.15.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a Board You can set the monitoring status and the automatic reporting status of monitored objects. The T2000 monitors all the performance of the board, but the automatic reporting feature is disabled by default. You can modify the value of the attribute according to the requirement.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Performance Monitor Status from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select a condition from the Monitored Object Filter Condition drop-down list. Step 3 Set the Monitor Status, 15-Minute Auto-Report and 24-Hour Auto-Report. Click Apply. ----End
B.15.3 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performance monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running of the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed by maintenance personnel.
Prerequisite The NE time must be synchronized with the T2000 server time.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Performance > NE Performance Monitor Time from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitor parameters according to the requirement. Click Apply. ----End
B.15.4 Resetting Board Performance Registers After a network test or fault recovery but before the official operation, you need to reset the performance register so that the system enters a new performance monitoring period.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Reset Board Performance Register from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the registers that you want to reset.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-15
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Step 3 Click Reset and the confirmation dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Click OK. ----End
B.16 Modifying the Services Configuration After a service is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the service based on the following task sets. B.16.1 Deleting Cross-Connection Service When you need to modify or re-configure cross-connections, you need to first delete them. B.16.2 Converting an SNCP Service to a Non-Protection Service The SNCP service has the dual and fed selective receiving function and is applicable to the protection for the cross-subnet service. When configuring WDM services on a per-NE basis, you can use this method to convert SNCP services that are already configured to non-protection services.
B.16.1 Deleting Cross-Connection Service When you need to modify or re-configure cross-connections, you need to first delete them.
Background Information
CAUTION Deleting cross-connections may interrupt services.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click Query to query the information about the existing cross-connections. B-16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
Step 3 Select the cross-connections to be deleted and click Delete. Step 4 In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. ----End
B.16.2 Converting an SNCP Service to a Non-Protection Service The SNCP service has the dual and fed selective receiving function and is applicable to the protection for the cross-subnet service. When configuring WDM services on a per-NE basis, you can use this method to convert SNCP services that are already configured to non-protection services.
Prerequisite The SNCP service must be created.
Background Information NOTE
Converting an SNCP service to a non-protection service may interrupt the service.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab, click Query to query services of the NE. Step 3 Right-click on the desired SNCP service and choose SNCP Working Service Convert to NonProtection Service from the shortcut menu. In the prompt dialog box displayed, click OK. The protection service is deleted automatically. NOTE
You can also choose SNCP Protection Service Convert to Non-Protection Service from the shortcut menu. In this case, the working service is deleted automatically.
Step 4 Right-click a unidirectional service from the service source board to the line board of another direction, and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. In the Confirm dialog box , click OK. Step 5 Optional: If there are intermediate NEs that protection service pass through, delete bidirectional pass-through services between line boards. NOTE
When choose SNCP Protection Service Convert to Non-Protection Service, you need to perform this operation on all the intermediate NEs that normal services pass through.
----End
B.17 Switching the Working Mode of the LQM2 The default working mode of the LQM2 board is 2LQM Mode. When the working mode is switched to AP8 Mode, you need to configure the board and add the IN2/OUT2 optical interface according to this section. Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-17
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Prerequisite The physical and logical LQM2 board must be configured.
Background Information This section describes how to configure the LQM2 board and add an optical interface when the working mode of the board is switched from 2LQM Mode to AP8 Mode. When the working mode of the board is switched from AP8 Mode to 2LQM Mode, the configuration of the board is similar except that you do not need to add the IN2/OUT2 optical interface.
Procedure Step 1 Delete the cross-connections on the LQM2 board: 1.
In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Crossconnection Service Management from the Function Tree. Click Query. The Working cross-connection field displays all the working cross-connections on the LQM2 board.
2.
Select all the working cross-connections on the LQM2 board, Click Delete. In the displayed prompt dialog box, click OK.
Step 2 Delete the service type on the LQM2 board: 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the LQM2 board and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
On the right of the user interface, select By Board/Port (Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Service Type of optical interface 3 to optical interface 10 to None, and then click Apply.
3.
Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
Step 3 Change the working mode of the LQM2 board: 1.
Select By Function and then choose Board Mode from the drop-down menu.
2.
Set Board Mode to AP8 Mode, and then click Apply.
Step 4 Add the IN2/OUT2 optical interface of the LQM2 board: B-18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
1.
In the NE Explorer, right-click the LQM2 board and then choose Path View. The Path View window is displayed.
2.
Right-click the blank space on the right of the Path View window, and then choose Add Port.
3.
The Add Port dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
----End
B.18 Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data For the security of the NE data, you can back up and restore the NE data. B.18.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods You need to back up important NE data during daily maintenance. This ensures that the SCC board of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after the NE data in the DRDB database of the SCC board is lost or a power failure occurs on the equipment. This section describes several NE data backup and restoration methods. You can select the method as required. B.18.2 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC Board Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-19
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
When the database file is lost due to the NE maintenance or NE fault, you can restore the NE data from the DRDB database file that is already backed up to the Flash database on the SCC board. B.18.3 Restoring Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client This topic describes how to restore the device data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client.
B.18.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods You need to back up important NE data during daily maintenance. This ensures that the SCC board of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after the NE data in the DRDB database of the SCC board is lost or a power failure occurs on the equipment. This section describes several NE data backup and restoration methods. You can select the method as required.
Comparison of Backup and Restoration Methods The locations for backing up and restoring the NE database include the SCC board, local server and remote server. Different storage locations determine different types of backup and restoration methods. See Table B-1. Table B-1 Backup and restoration methods and application scenarios Backup and Restoration Method
Application Scenario
Back up/Restore the NE database to/from an SCC board
Backs up the NE data in the DRDB database of the SCC board to the flash database, when the SCC board does not have a CF card. During the restoration, after a warm reset (or cold reset) on the SCC board, the SCC board reads the configuration from the DRDB (or flash) database. l after a warm reset on the SCC board, the MDB reads the configuration from the DRDB database. l after a cold reset on the SCC board, the MDB reads the configuration from the FLASH database.
Back up/Restore the NE data to/from an NMS server
Stores the data in the computer where the NMS server resides. During restoration, you can select the backup file in the directory where the NE data is saved.
Back up/Restore the NE data to/from an NMS client
Stores the data in the computer where the NMS client resides. During restoration, you can select the backup file in the directory where the NE data is saved.
B-20
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
NOTE
After the warm resets on other boards, the NE memory data is issued to the boards. When the actual configuration of the board is consistent with the configuration stored in the database for restoration, the process of delivering configuration data to the board does not interrupt services.
NE Database The NE configuration data is saved in the NE database. There are three types of NE databases as follows: l
MDB: Memory database. The data in a MDB database is changed when the configuration information is changed. The data is lost when the SCC board is reset or a power failure occurs.
l
DRDB: Dynamic random database. The data that is verified is automatically saved in the DRDB database. The data is lost when a power failure occurs but not lost after a warm reset is performed.
l
FDB: Flash database. There are the FDB0 and FDB1 databases. The data can be saved permanently.
When the NE configuration data is issued to the SCC board, it is saved in the MDB database. If the verification is successful, the SCC board automatically copies the contents in the MDB database to the DRDB database and issues the verified configuration data to the boards. The DRDB database is copied the DRDB database to the FDB database, as a backup of the DRDB database. When the NE is restarted after a power failure, the SCC board checks whether there is configuration data in the DRDB database. If yes, the data are restored from the DRDB database. If the data in the DRDB database is damaged, the data is restored from the FDB0 and FDB1 databases.
NE Configuration Data The NE configuration data refers to the information in the DRDB database of the NE, such as the board configuration, clock configuration and protection relations of the NE. It is the instruction file of the NE and the key for the NE to perform normally in the entire network.
NE Database Package The NE database package is a package that contains all database files on an NE and a file list that defines and manages those files. The NE database package and NE configuration data are the same data on the NE in different releases. You can perform the NE database package backup and restoration on the release 5.00.06 NE or the NE of later release.
B.18.2 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC Board When the database file is lost due to the NE maintenance or NE fault, you can restore the NE data from the DRDB database file that is already backed up to the Flash database on the SCC board.
Prerequisite l
You must log in to the NE as an NE user with system level authority.
l
The NE data from DRDB database must be backed up to the flash database on the SCC board.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-21
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Procedure Step 1 Select Slot Layout in the NE Explorer. Step 2 Right-click the active SCC board, choose Warm Reset or Cold Reset. NOTE
l The reset modes for different SCC board are different. You need to choose the reset mode as required. l When you choose Cold Reset or Warm Reset, the Warning dialog box is displayed. Click OK to start the reset.
Step 3 A dialog box is displayed. Click OK to complete the reset. ----End
B.18.3 Restoring Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client This topic describes how to restore the device data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client.
Prerequisite l
The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started.
l
To restore the device data from the NMS client, the SFTP server must be configured, and the SFTP service must be started.
Background Information l
You cannot restore device data for multiple devices of different device types.
l
When you select the device type in the device tree, all the device information related to the device type is displayed in the Device View table.
Procedure Step 1 On the Main Topology, choose Data Center > Device Management from the main menu. The Device View table is displayed. Step 2 In the Device View table, right-click the device(s) whose data you want to restore. Step 3 Select Recover... to open the Recover dialog box. Step 4 Select the backup file to be restored from the File Name drop-down list. If the backup files are not listed in the File Name drop-down list, select Browse... to select the backup file to be restored in the Select File dialog box, as shown below.
B-22
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
Step 5 Select the NMS Server or NMS Client option button to restore the backup file for the selected device(s). By default, the NMS Server option button is selected. l If the NMS Server option button is selected, select the backup file to be restored from the NMS Server. The selected backup file path is displayed in the Select File dialog box. to select the backup file to be l If the NMS Client option button is selected, click restored from the NMS client. The selected backup file path is displayed in the following Selected File dialog box. Step 6 Click OK. The selected backup file path from the NMS Server or NMS Client is displayed in the File Name drop-down list. Step 7 Click Start and the Operation Confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click Yes to start the restoration operation. ----End
Result After you restore the device data, right-click the device in the Device View table, and choose Activation Database... from the shortcut menu. The Activation Database dialog box is displayed. Click Start to activate the device database. NOTE
If you do not activate the software within five minutes after the restoration is successfully complete, the T2000 automatically rolls back the software and cancels the restoration operation.
B.19 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode In Fiber/Cable Management, you can manage the fiber connections between NEs and inside NEs in a unified manner. Compared with the graphic mode, the creating fiber connections in the Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-23
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
list mode is not visual. Hence, the list mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a few fiber connections only.
Prerequisite The board on relevant NEs must be created. Before the creation of fibers, it is recommended that you set Configure Wavelength No./ Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of the port on the tunable OTU as the designed wavelength.
Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Fiber/Cable Management from the Main Menu. Step 2 Click Create, and the Create Fibers in Batches dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click Select Object, select all the NEs you need to create fiber/cable in the dialog box. Step 4 Click OK. Step 5 Click New in the Create Fibers in Batches dialog box. Step 6 Set Direction, Source NE, Source Port, Sink NE and Sink Port.
Step 7 Click Apply. TIP
You can create multiple fibers/cables and set parameters in step 5, click Apply.
Step 8 Repeat Step 5-7 to create another fiber connection. Step 9 Click Cancel to complete the settings. The created fiber connections are displayed in the Fiber/ Cable Information list. ----End
Postrequisite After you create fiber connections, you need to scan wavelengths to ensure that the fiber connections are correct and the line communication is available.
B.20 Configuring Services by Creating WDM Trails You can configure services on NEs by creating OCh, ODUk, or client trails. To create an OCh, ODUk, or client trail, you need to search for or create the information about the trail at the B-24
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
corresponding server layer and then specify the source and sink of the OCh, ODUk, or client trail.
Prerequisite All fibers must be created properly. A trail at the corresponding server layer must be searched out or created. All the NEs on the trail must communicate with each other properly.
Tools, Meters, and Materials The T2000 must be used.
Precautions NOTE
Before creating a WDM trail, you need to search for or create a trail at the corresponding server layer. The details are as follows: l Before creating an OCh trail, you need to search for an appropriate trail at the OMS server layer. l Before creating an ODUk trail, you need to search for an appropriate trail at the OTUk server layer. l Before creating a client trail, you need to search for or create an appropriate trail at the OCh and ODUk server layer. NOTE
You can configure services by creating client trails for only boards that support the cross-connection function.
Procedure l
Operations on the T2000 For detailed description of searching for, creating, and managing WDM trails, see the online help for the T2000.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
1.
In the Main Menu, choose Trail > WDM Trail Creation to display the WDM Trail Creation navigation.
2.
Set Level, Rate, and Direction for the trail to be created.
3.
Click Browse. The Select Board Port-Source window is displayed. In this window, select the NE, board, and optical interface.
4.
Optional: Click a server tail between the source and sink NEs. In the displayed dialog box, specify a route as the explicit route for the services. You can click the route again and cancel the selected explicit route in the displayed dialog box. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-25
B Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration
5.
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Optional: Double-click another NE in the subnet to specify it as an excluded NE. The sign is shown on the NE. Double-click the NE again to cancel your selection.
6.
Optional: Click Specify Route Channel to display the Specify Route Channel dialog box. After selecting the working channel of the services, click OK.
7.
Click the General Attributes tab and then set the basic attributes such as name and ID of this trail on the tab page.
8.
Select the Activate the trail check box and click Apply to create this trail. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
----End
B-26
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
C
C Service Configuration Examples
Service Configuration Examples
C.1 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the GE Service This configuration example describes the process of transparent transmission of the GE service through configuration of the cross-connect service. C.2 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SAN Services This topic describes how to configure the transparent transmission of the SAN services through an example. C.3 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the OTN Service This configuration example describes the process of transparent transmission of the OTN service through configuration of the cross-connect service. C.4 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SDH Services This topic describes how to configure the transparent transmission of the SDH services through an example. C.5 Configuring the Hybrid Transmission of the GE/STM-1 Services in the Service Package Mode This example is used to describe how to configure the hybrid transmission of the GE/STM-1 services in the service package mode.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-1
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
C Service Configuration Examples
C.1 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the GE Service This configuration example describes the process of transparent transmission of the GE service through configuration of the cross-connect service. C.1.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the GE service in the ring network. C.1.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation This section describes how to configure the GE service transparent transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation. C.1.3 Configuration Process (In the Service Package Mode) The configuration in this example can be completed in a one-touch manner after the GE transparent transmission service package is executed. C.1.4 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure the GE service on NEs A and B. This section describes only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.
C.1.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the GE service in the ring network.
Service Requirement In the network shown in Figure C-1, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the NEs are OADM NEs. The service requirement is as follows: User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional GE service is available between NE A and NE B. Figure C-1 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service User1
EAST WEST
LQM2 LQM2
NMS
B
D
C
User2 EAST WEST
A
LQM2 LQM2 :OADM
C-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
C Service Configuration Examples
Board Configuration Information In this example, two LQM2 boards should be configured on each NE.
C.1.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation This section describes how to configure the GE service transparent transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation. One GE service is available between NE A and NE B. Figure C-2 shows the service signal flow between NE A and NE B. Figure C-2 Unidirectional service on each NE B
A 3(RX1/TX1)
LQM2
LQM2
4(RX2/TX2)
3(RX1/TX1)
2(IN2/OUT2)
2(IN2/OUT2) 201(LP1/LP1)
4(RX2/TX2)
201(LP1/LP1) 1(IN1/OUT1)
1(IN1/OUT1)
: WDM-side services
: client-side services
: virtual channel
NOTE
The 201 (LP1/LP1) is the logical port. When it is connected to the WDM-side IN/OUT port, no configuration is required.
l
GE service of station A: The service is added by using the number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on optical NE A and 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical NE A.
l
GE service of station B: The service is dropped by using the 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical NE B and number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on optical NE B.
Figure C-3 shows the wavelength allocation of NE A and NE B. Figure C-3 Wavelength allocation diagram Wavelength(nm) /Frequency(THz)
A East
B West
1532.68/ 195.60
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-3
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
C Service Configuration Examples
C.1.3 Configuration Process (In the Service Package Mode) The configuration in this example can be completed in a one-touch manner after the GE transparent transmission service package is executed.
Background Information When the service of another type needs to be added through any one of optical interfaces 3-6 of the LQM2, re-configure the interface in the common mode; otherwise, the service is not available.
Procedure Step 1 Configuring the add services at station A 1.
Select the NE and choose Configuration > Service Package from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Query.
3.
Select the GE bypass service package and click Start. Then, click OK in the displayed dialog box. The GE bypass hybrid service package is configured on NE.
NOTE
Package ID: Each service package is assigned with one ID, which cannot be changed. Description: Indicates the name of the service package.
Step 2 Configuring the drop services at station B 1.
Select the NE and choose Configuration > Service Package from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Query.
3.
Select the GE bypass service package and click Start. Then, click OK in the displayed dialog box. The GE bypass hybrid service package is configured on NE.
Step 3 Optional: Refer to Adding WDM-Side Ports to add optical interface 2. Step 4 Optional: Check the related parameters after the service package is configured.
C-4
1.
Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Query to query the configured services.
3.
Select the LQM2 board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Click Query. Then, the system indicates that Service Type of optical interfaces 3 and 4 of the LQM2 board is GE.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
C Service Configuration Examples
4.
Click the Advanced Attributes tab and then click Query. The system indicates that AutoNegotiation of GE is set to Disabled.
5.
Select By Function and click Query. The system indicates that LPT Enabled is set to Disabled.
NOTE
If the LQM2 board mode is "2LQM", it will turn into "AP8" mode automatically after configuring service package.
----End
C.1.4 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure the GE service on NEs A and B. This section describes only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.
Precautions
CAUTION When configuring the cross-connect services, ensure that the WDM-side optical path number used at the transmit end is consistent with that at the receive end of a service in the same direction. Otherwise, the service cannot be available.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-5
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
C Service Configuration Examples
Procedure Step 1 When configuring the add and drop services, first configure the service type of the WDM interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see Configuring the Service Type. Step 2 Configure the add service on NE A. 1.
Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management in the Function Tree.
2.
In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.
3.
In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for , Service Level, and Service Type according to the planning.
4.
Click OK, and thus one cross-connect service route is created.
Step 3 Configure the drop service on NE B.
C-6
1.
Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management in the Function Tree.
2.
In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.
3.
In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for , Service Level, and Service Type according to the planning.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
4.
C Service Configuration Examples
Click OK, and thus one cross-connect service route is created.
----End
C.2 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SAN Services This topic describes how to configure the transparent transmission of the SAN services through an example. C.2.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the SAN service in the ring network. C.2.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation This section describes how to configure the SAN service transparent transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation. C.2.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure the SAN service on NEs A and B. This section describes only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.
C.2.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the SAN service in the ring network.
Service Requirement In the network shown in Figure C-4, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the NEs are OADM NEs. The service requirement is as follows: User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional SAN service is available between NE A and NE B.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-7
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
C Service Configuration Examples
Figure C-4 Configuration networking diagram of the SAN service User1
EAST WEST
LQM2 LQM2
NMS A
B
D
C
User2 EAST WEST
LQM2 LQM2 :OADM
Board Configuration Information In this example, two LQM2 boards should be configured on each NE.
C.2.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation This section describes how to configure the SAN service transparent transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation. One SAN service is available between NE A and NE B. Figure C-5 shows the service signal flow between NE A and NE B. Figure C-5 Unidirectional service on each NE B
A 3(RX1/TX1)
LQM2
LQM2 2(IN2/OUT2)
4(RX2/TX2)
201(LP1/LP1) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)
: client-side services
1(IN1/OUT1)
3(RX1/TX1)
2(IN2/OUT2)
4(RX2/TX2)
201(LP1/LP1) 1(IN1/OUT1)
: WDM-side services
7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)
: virtual channel
NOTE
The 201 (LP1/LP1) is the logical port. When it is connected to the WDM-side IN/OUT port, no configuration is required.
C-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
l
C Service Configuration Examples
SAN service of station A: The service is added by using the number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on optical NE A and 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical NE A.
l
SAN service of station B: The service is dropped by using the 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical NE B and number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on optical NE B.
Figure C-6 shows the wavelength allocation of NE A and NE B. Figure C-6 Wavelength allocation diagram Wavelength(nm) /Frequency(THz)
A East
B West
1532.68/ 195.60
C.2.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure the SAN service on NEs A and B. This section describes only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.
Precautions
CAUTION When configuring the cross-connect services, ensure that the WDM-side optical path number used at the transmit end is consistent with that at the receive end of a service in the same direction. Otherwise, the service cannot be available.
Procedure Step 1 When configuring the add and drop services, first configure the service type of the WDM interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see Configuring the Service Type. Step 2 Configure the add service on NE A. 1.
Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management in the Function Tree.
2.
In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.
3.
In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for , Service Level, and Service Type according to the planning.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-9
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
C Service Configuration Examples
4.
Click OK, and thus one cross-connect service route is created.
Step 3 Configure the drop service on NE B. 1.
Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management in the Function Tree.
2.
In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.
3.
In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for , Service Level, and Service Type according to the planning.
4.
Click OK, and thus one cross-connect service route is created.
----End
C-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
C Service Configuration Examples
C.3 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the OTN Service This configuration example describes the process of transparent transmission of the OTN service through configuration of the cross-connect service. C.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the OTN service in the ring network. C.3.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation This section describes how to configure the OTN service transparent transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation. C.3.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure the OTN service on NEs A and B. This section describes only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.
C.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the OTN service in the ring network.
Service Requirement In the network shown in Figure C-7, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the NEs are OADM NEs. The service requirement is as follows: User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional OTN service is available between NE A and NE B. Figure C-7 Configuration networking diagram of the OTN service User1
EAST WEST
LQM2 LQM2
NMS
B
D
C
User2 EAST WEST
A
LQM2 LQM2 :OADM
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-11
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
C Service Configuration Examples
Board Configuration Information In this example, two LQM2 boards should be configured on each NE.
C.3.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation This section describes how to configure the OTN service transparent transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation. One OTN service is available between NE A and NE B. Figure C-8 shows the service signal flow between NE A and NE B. Figure C-8 Unidirectional service on each NE B
A 3(RX1/TX1)
LQM2
LQM2
4(RX2/TX2)
201(LP1/LP1) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)
3(RX1/TX1)
2(IN2/OUT2)
2(IN2/OUT2)
4(RX2/TX2)
201(LP1/LP1) 1(IN1/OUT1)
1(IN1/OUT1)
: WDM-side services
: client-side services
7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)
: virtual channel
NOTE
The 201 (LP1/LP1) is the logical port. When it is connected to the WDM-side IN/OUT port, no configuration is required.
l
OTN service of station A: The service is added by using the number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on optical NE A and 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical NE A.
l
OTN service of station B: The service is dropped by using the 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical NE B and number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on optical NE B.
Figure C-9 shows the wavelength allocation of NE A and NE B. Figure C-9 Wavelength allocation diagram Wavelength(nm) /Frequency(THz)
A East
B West
1532.68/ 195.60
C-12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
C Service Configuration Examples
C.3.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure the OTN service on NEs A and B. This section describes only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.
Precautions
CAUTION When configuring the cross-connect services, ensure that the WDM-side optical path number used at the transmit end is consistent with that at the receive end of a service in the same direction. Otherwise, the service cannot be available.
Procedure Step 1 When configuring the add and drop services, first configure the service type of the WDM interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see Configuring the Service Type. Step 2 Configure the add service on NE A. 1.
Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management in the Function Tree.
2.
In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.
3.
In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for , Service Level, and Service Type according to the planning.
4.
Click OK, and thus one cross-connect service route is created.
Step 3 Configure the drop service on NE B. 1.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management in the Function Tree. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-13
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
C Service Configuration Examples
2.
In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.
3.
In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for , Service Level, and Service Type according to the planning.
4.
Click OK, and thus one cross-connect service route is created.
----End
C.4 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SDH Services This topic describes how to configure the transparent transmission of the SDH services through an example. C.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the SDH service in the ring network. C.4.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation This section describes how to configure the SDH service transparent transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation. C.4.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure the SDH service on NEs A and B. This section describes only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.
C.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the SDH service in the ring network.
Service Requirement In the network shown in Figure C-10, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the NEs are OADM NEs. The service requirement is as follows: C-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
C Service Configuration Examples
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional SDH service is available between NE A and NE B. Figure C-10 Configuration networking diagram of the SDH service User1
EAST WEST
LQM2 LQM2
NMS A
B
D
C
User2 EAST WEST
LQM2 LQM2 :OADM
Board Configuration Information In this example, two LQM2 boards should be configured on each NE.
C.4.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation This section describes how to configure the SDH service transparent transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation. One SDH service is available between NE A and NE B. Figure C-11 shows the service signal flow between NE A and NE B. Figure C-11 Unidirectional service on each NE B
A 3(RX1/TX1)
LQM2
LQM2 2(IN2/OUT2)
4(RX2/TX2)
201(LP1/LP1) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)
: client-side services
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
1(IN1/OUT1)
3(RX1/TX1)
2(IN2/OUT2)
4(RX2/TX2)
201(LP1/LP1) 1(IN1/OUT1)
: WDM-side services
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)
: virtual channel C-15
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
C Service Configuration Examples NOTE
The 201 (LP1/LP1) is the logical port. When it is connected to the WDM-side IN/OUT port, no configuration is required.
l
SDH service of station A: The service is added by using the number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on optical NE A and 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical NE A.
l
SDH service of station B: The service is dropped by using the 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical NE B and number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on optical NE B.
Figure C-12 shows the wavelength allocation of NE A and NE B. Figure C-12 Wavelength allocation diagram Wavelength(nm) /Frequency(THz)
A East
B West
1532.68/ 195.60
C.4.3 Configuration Process This section describes how to configure the SDH service on NEs A and B. This section describes only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.
Precautions
CAUTION When configuring the cross-connect services, ensure that the WDM-side optical path number used at the transmit end is consistent with that at the receive end of a service in the same direction. Otherwise, the service cannot be available.
Procedure Step 1 When configuring the add and drop services, first configure the service type of the WDM interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see Configuring the Service Type. Step 2 Configure the add service on NE A.
C-16
1.
Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management in the Function Tree.
2.
In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
C Service Configuration Examples
3.
In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for , Service Level, and Service Type according to the planning.
4.
Click OK, and thus one cross-connect service route is created.
Step 3 Configure the drop service on NE B. 1.
Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management in the Function Tree.
2.
In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.
3.
In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for , Service Level, and Service Type according to the planning.
4.
Click OK, and thus one cross-connect service route is created.
----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-17
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
C Service Configuration Examples
C.5 Configuring the Hybrid Transmission of the GE/STM-1 Services in the Service Package Mode This example is used to describe how to configure the hybrid transmission of the GE/STM-1 services in the service package mode. C.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the GE service and STM-1 service in the ring network. C.5.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation This section describes how to configure the GE service and STM-1 service transparent transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation. C.5.3 Configuration Process The configuration in this example can be completed in a one-touch manner after the GE/STM-1 hybrid transmission service package is executed.
C.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram This section describes how to configure the GE service and STM-1 service in the ring network.
Service Requirement In the network shown in Figure C-13, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the NEs are OADM NEs. The service requirement is as follows: User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional GE service and STM-1 service is available between NE A and NE B. Figure C-13 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service and STM-1 service User1
EAST WEST
LQM2 LQM2
NMS
B
D
C
User2 EAST WEST
A
LQM2 LQM2 :OADM
C-18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
C Service Configuration Examples
Board Configuration Information In this example, two LQM2 boards should be configured on each NE.
C.5.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation This section describes how to configure the GE service and STM-1 service transparent transmission signal flow and how to plan the wavelength allocation. GE service and STM-1 service is available between NE A and NE B. Figure C-14 shows the service signal flow between NE A and NE B. Figure C-14 Unidirectional service on each NE
GE GE STM-1 STM-1
3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4)
A
B
LQM2 201(LP1/LP1)-1 201(LP1/LP1)-2
LQM2 201(LP1/LP1)-1 201(LP1/LP1)-2
1(IN1/OUT1)
1(IN1/OUT1)
2(IN2/OUT2)
2(IN2/OUT2)
: client-side services
GE 3(RX1/TX1) GE 4(RX2/TX2) STM-1 5(RX3/TX3) STM-1 6(RX4/TX4)
: WDM-side services
: virtual channel
NOTE
The 201 (LP1/LP1) is the logical port. When it is connected to the WDM-side IN/OUT port, no configuration is required.
l
GE service and STM-1 service of station A: The service is added by using the number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on optical NE A and 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical NE A.
l
GE service and STM-1 service of station B: The service is dropped by using the 201 (LP1/LP1) logical port of the LQM2 on optical NE B and number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the LQM2 on optical NE B.
Figure C-15 shows the wavelength allocation of NE A and NE B. Figure C-15 Wavelength allocation diagram Wavelength(nm) /Frequency(THz)
A East
B West
1531.90/ 195.70 1532.68/ 195.60 1533.47/ 195.50 1535.82/ 195.20
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-19
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
C Service Configuration Examples
C.5.3 Configuration Process The configuration in this example can be completed in a one-touch manner after the GE/STM-1 hybrid transmission service package is executed.
Background Information When the service of another type needs to be added through any one of optical interfaces 3-6 of the LQM2, re-configure the interface in the common mode; otherwise, the service is not available.
Precautions
CAUTION When the service package is started, the configuration that supported service package boards on the NE is cleared first and then the service package is started.
Procedure Step 1 Configuring the add services at station A 1.
Select the NE and choose Configuration > Service Package from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Query. Then, click Close on the Operation Result dialog box.
3.
Select the GE/STM1 hybrid service package and click Start. Then, click OK on the Confirm dialog box. Then, the GE/STM1 hybrid service package is configured on NE.
NOTE
Package ID: Each service package is assigned with one ID, which cannot be changed. Package Type: Indicates the type of the service package.
Step 2 Configuring the drop services at station B 1.
Select the NE and choose Configuration > Service Package from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Query. Then, click Close on the Operation Result dialog box.
3.
Select the GE/STM1 hybrid service package and click Start. Then, click OK on the Confirmdialog box. Then, the GE/STM1 hybrid service package is configured on NE.
Step 3 Optional: Refer to Adding WDM-Side Ports to add optical interface 2. Step 4 Optional: Check the related parameters after the service package is configured.
C-20
1.
Select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection Service Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Query to query the configured services. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
C Service Configuration Examples
3.
Select the LQM2 board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Click Query. Then, the system indicates that Service Type of optical interfaces 3 and 4 of the LQM2 board is GE, and the Service Type of optical interfaces 5 and 6 of the LQM2 board is STM-1.
4.
Click the Advanced Attributes tab and then click Query. The system indicates that AutoNegotiation of GE is set to Disabled.
5.
Select By Function and click Query. The system indicates that LPT Enabled is set to Disabled.
NOTE
If the LQM2 board mode is "2LQM", it will turn into "AP8" mode automatically after configuring service package.
----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-21
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
D Parameter Reference
D
Parameter Reference
D.1 Attributes of NEs In this user interface, you can view and set NE attributes, including NE ID, subrack type, and IP address. D.2 Attributes of NE Users In this user interface, you can manage NE users for the specific NE. You can query, add, delete and modify an NE user, and set password for the NE user. D.3 NE Time Synchronization In this user interface, you can set NE time, to keep it synchronized with the T2000 server time. D.4 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration In this user interface, you can configure the cross-connections of various WDM services. D.5 Port Protection Parameters In this user interface, you can create, configure and modify the port protection group. Port protection is used to switch the service to the protection port when the working port becomes faulty. It ensures service availability. A working port and the corresponding protection port are regarded as a port protection group. D.6 SNCP Service Control Parameters In this user interface, you can query and modify the attributes and status of an SNCP service.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-1
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
D Parameter Reference
D.1 Attributes of NEs In this user interface, you can view and set NE attributes, including NE ID, subrack type, and IP address.
Parameters Field
Value
Description
NE ID
1 to 49135
Displays the unique ID of an NE on the NM for identifying an NE, which is the basis of communication between the NM and an NE.
Extended ID
1 to 254
For NE ID extension.
Default: 9 Gateway Type
IP Gateway, Serial Port
The gateway type of an NE decides the mode of communication between the NE and the NM.
User Name
For example: root
The NE name is used when logging in to the NE. Before the NE is configured, use the internally reserved user name for login.
Password
For example: T2000
Corresponds to the above NE user password. The corresponding password for the reserved user is password.
D.2 Attributes of NE Users In this user interface, you can manage NE users for the specific NE. You can query, add, delete and modify an NE user, and set password for the NE user.
Parameters Table D-1 NE user parameters
D-2
Field
Value
Description
NE
For example: NE70
The operation object selected.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
D Parameter Reference
Field
Value
Description
NE User
For example: USER
The name of the NE user. The name consists of 4-16 characters. It can be a combination of letters, digits, spaces and underlines. Note that at least one letter must be included.
User Level
Monitor level, Operation level, Maintenance level, System level, Debug level.
The operations carried out by the NE user are classified into five levels, namely monitor level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, debug level from the lowest level to the highest. Each user of higher level can perform all the functions that a lower level user can do. The detailed right settings for each level are: l Monitor level: all query commands, log in/out, and modification of its own password. l Operation level: all settings for fault and performance, partial security settings, and partial configuration. l Maintenance level: partial security settings, partial configuration, communication settings, and log management. l System level: all security settings, all configuration. l Debug level: all security settings, all configuration, and all debug commands. Debug level is the highest level.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-3
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
D Parameter Reference
Field
Value
Description
New Password
-
New password of the user. The password consists of 6-16 characters. It can be a combination of English characters, digits, space and underlines. Note that the password cannot be composed all by digits or all by letters. It cannot contain special characters.
Confirm Password
-
The new password of the user that you need to enter again.
User Group Belonged
For example: Administrator User Group
Displays the belonged user group name.
Login Allowed
Yes, No
Sets whether the NE user is allowed to log in.
Permanently Valid or not
Yes, No
Sets whether the NE user is permanently valid or not.
Valid From
For example: 2005-05-07 10:18:07
The start time of user validity.
Valid Till
For example: 2005-05-07 10:18:07
The expiration time of user validity.
Whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately
Yes, No
Sets whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately.
Records of all Logins
Yes, No
Sets whether the NE user is valid permanently.
Allowable Login Start Date
For example: Sunday
Sets the allowable login start date. The parameter is valid when Records of all Logins is set to No.
Allowable Login Start Time
For example: 00:00:00
Time format is hour: min: second. Sets the allowable login start time. The parameter is valid when Records of all Logins is set to No.
Allowable Login End Date
D-4
For example: Saturday
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Sets the allowable login end time. The parameter is valid when Records of all Logins is set to No.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
D Parameter Reference
Field
Value
Description
Allowable Login End Time
For example: 23:59:59
Time format is hour: min: second. Sets the allowable login end time. The parameter is valid when Records of all Logins is set to No.
Time to Lock User for No Activities (Day)
0-255
Sets the time to lock the NE user for no activities.
Maximum Password Validity (Day)
25-999
Sets the maximum password validity.
Password Modification Time
For example: 2007-01-23 10:28:26
Displays the password modification time.
Last Login Time
For example: 2007-01-23 10:28:00
Displays the last login time of the NE user.
D.3 NE Time Synchronization In this user interface, you can set NE time, to keep it synchronized with the T2000 server time.
Parameters
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Field
Value
Description
NM Time
For example: 2006-11-04 20:30:00
Displays the time of the T2000 server in real time.
NE Name
For example: NE1
Displays the name of the NE.
NE ID
Format: Extended ID-ID
Displays the ID of the NE.
Synchronous Mode
NM, NULL
Displays the synchronization mode of NE Time.
Standard NTP Authentication
Enabled, Disabled
Displays or sets whether the standard NTP authentication is enabled.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-5
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
D Parameter Reference
Field
Value
Description
Server Enabled
ECC Server, Disabled
Displays or sets whether to set it to the NTP server and the type of the NTP server. When the ECC protocol is used for communication between NEs, the gateway NE is an ECC server. So, the Server Enabled parameter is set to ECC Server. While nongateway NEs are ECC clients and the Server Enabled parameter is set to Disabled. When the IP protocol is used for communication between NEs, all NEs are IP clients and the Server Enabled parameter is set to Disabled. OptiX OSN 1800 series do not support.
Client Enabled
ECC Client, IP Client, Disabled
Displays or sets whether to set it to the NTP client and the type of the NTP client. When the IP protocol is used for communication between the NE and the NTP server, the NE is an IP client and the Client Enabled parameter are set to IP Client. OptiX OSN 1800 series do not support.
D-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
D Parameter Reference
Field
Value
Description
Synchronous Server
NE ID, IP address
Displays or sets the IP address or NE ID of the NTP synchronous server. If the client type is ECC Client, set it to the NE ID of the synchronous server. If the client type is IP Client, set it to the IP address of the synchronous server. OptiX OSN 1800 series do not support.
Polling Period(min)
2 to 1440 Minutes
Displays the period of synchronizing the NE time with the NTP server time. OptiX OSN 1800 series do not support.
The Number of Sampling
1 to 8
It indicates how many times the NTP server time will be sampled in a querying cycle. The NTP server time is the average of that sampled. OptiX OSN 1800 series do not support.
NE Current Time
For example: 2006-11-04 20:30:00
Displays the current time of the NE.
Recent NE Synchronization Time
For example: 2006-11-04 20:30:00
The latest time when the NE was synchronized. If the difference between the current NE time and the latest time when the NE was synchronized is within two querying cycles, it indicates the NTP server is running normally. Otherwise, it indicates the NTP server is not running normally, and the color of the parameter box will change to the one that is for "Major Alarm".
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-7
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
D Parameter Reference
Field Synchronization Starting Time
Synchronizati on Starting Time
Value
Description
For example: 2006-11-04 20:30:00
Sets the start time of synchronizing the NE time with the NM time. Applied only when the NE time is synchronized with the NM time.
Synchronizati on Period (days)
1 to 300
Sets the cycle of automatically synchronizing the NE time with the NM time.
Default: 1
Applied only when the NE time is synchronized with the NM time.
D.4 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration In this user interface, you can configure the cross-connections of various WDM services.
Parameters Table D-2 Descriptions of the WDM service parameters
D-8
Field
Value
Remarks
Level
GE, Any, ODU1
Determines the service rate.
Service Type
For example, FE, STM-1, FICON
When Level of a new service is set to Any, you can select a specific service type.
Direction
Unidirectional, Bidirectional
In the case of a bidirectional service, the service takes the same route in the transmit and receive directions. In the case of a unidirectional service, the service takes different routes in the transmit and receive directions.
Source Slot
Slot-board name
When you create a service, select a source board for the service.
Source Optical Port
Port number (port name)
When you create a service, select a source port for the service.
Source Optical Channel
Channel ID
When you create a service, select a source channel for the service.
Sink Slot
Slot-board name
When you create a service, select a sink board for the service.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
D Parameter Reference
Field
Value
Remarks
Sink Optical Port
Port number (port name)
When you create a service, select a sink port for the service.
Sink Optical Channel
Channel ID
When you create a service, select a sink channel for the service.
Source Channel
Slot No.-board nameoptical interface No.channel ID
Displays the source channel of the service after the creation is complete.
For example, 3LQM2-3(RX1/ TX1)-1 Sink Channel
Slot No.-board nameoptical interface No.channel ID
Displays the source channel of the service after the creation is complete.
For example, 3LQM2-201(LP1/ LP1)-1
D.5 Port Protection Parameters In this user interface, you can create, configure and modify the port protection group. Port protection is used to switch the service to the protection port when the working port becomes faulty. It ensures service availability. A working port and the corresponding protection port are regarded as a port protection group.
Parameters Table D-3 Protection Group Parameters
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Field
Value
Description
Protection Group Name
For example: NE811-52910
Displays the protection group name.
Protection Type
Optical Line Protection, Intra-Board 1+1 Protection, Client 1+1 Protection, InterSubrack 1+1 Optical Channel Protection
Displays the protection type of the protection group.
NE with Working Channel
For example: NE811
Sets the NE of the working channel.
Board with Working Channel
For example: 134-12OLP
Sets the board of the working channel.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-9
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
D Parameter Reference
Field
Value
Description
Working Channel
For example: 1(RI1/TO1)
Sets and queries the working channel.
NE with Protection Channel
For example: NE811
Sets the NE of the protection channel.
Board with Protection Channel
For example: 134-12OLP
Sets the board of the protection channel.
Protection Channel
For example: 2(RI2/TO2)
Sets and queries the protection channel.
NE with Control Channel/ Monitoring Channel
For example: NE811
Sets the NE of the control channel/monitoring channel.
Board with Control Channel/ Monitoring Channel
For example: 134-12OLP
Sets the board of the control channel/monitoring channel.
Restore Mode
Revertive, Non-Revertive
Indicates whether the service is automatically switched from the protection channel to the working channel after the working channel becomes normal.
Default: Non-Revertive
Revertive means that the service can be automatically switched. Non-Revertive means that the service is not switched to the working channel after the working channel becomes normal. NOTE In the case of the intra-board 1 +1 protection configured by using the OLP board, when the Monitoring Channel is configured, Revertive Mode can be only Non-revertive and cannot be configured.
WTR Time (s)
300-720 Default: 600
D-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The WTR time (s) parameter indicates the waiting time before the services in the protection group switch back to the working channel if the working channel is recovered when the protection group works in the revertive mode.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
D Parameter Reference
Field
Value
Description
SD Trigger Flag
Enable, Disable
The SD Trigger Flag parameter determines if the SD switching function of the wavelength protection group takes effect.
Default: Disable
Switching Status
Idle, WTR, Manual to Working channel, Manual to Protection channel, Force to Working channel, Force to Protection channel, SD Switched, SF Switched, Locked, Unknown
Displays the current switching status of the protection group.
Table D-4 Channel Status Parameters
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Field
Value
Description
Protection Group Name
For example: NE811-52910
Displays the protection group name.
Current Channel
Work, Protection, Unknown
Displays the path of the current service.
Working Channel
NE name- Slot No.- Board name- Optical interface number (Optical interface name)
Displays the working channel of the protection group.
Working Channel Status
Normal, SD, SF, Unknown
Displays the status of the working channel.
Working Channel Hold-Off Time
0-100
The Working Channel Hold-Off Time (100ms) parameter specifies the time period from the time that the system detects the switching condition in the working channel to the time that the switching is performed. This is to prevent protection switching from being performed repeatedly when the service state is unstable.
Control Channel/Monitoring Channel
NE name- Slot No.- Board name- Optical interface number (Optical interface name)
Default: 0
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Displays the channel information of the Control Channel/Monitoring Channel.
D-11
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
D Parameter Reference
Field
Value
Description
Control Channel/Monitoring Channel Hold-Off Time (100 ms)
0 to 100
Displays the hold-off time of the control board.
Protection Channel
NE name- Slot No.- Board name- Optical interface number (Optical interface name)
Displays the protection channel of the protection group.
Protection Channel Status
Normal, SD, SF, Unknown
Displays the status of the protection channel.
Protection Channel Hold-Off Time
0-100
The Protection Channel Hold-Off Time (100ms) parameter specifies the time period from the time that the system detects the switching condition in the protection channel to the time that the switching is performed.
NOTE This parameter can not be set in optical line protection.
Default: 0
D.6 SNCP Service Control Parameters In this user interface, you can query and modify the attributes and status of an SNCP service.
Parameters
D-12
Field
Value
Description
Service Source
Source Slot Number-Source Board Name-Source Port Number-Source Optical Channel Number
Displays the source optical channel of the service.
Service Sink
Sink Slot Number-Sink Board Name-Sink Port Number-Sink Optical Channel Number
Displays the sink optical channel of the service.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
D Parameter Reference
Field
Value
Description
Protection Type
SW SNCP, ODUk SNCP, MS SNCP
The Protection Type parameter provides users an option for choosing a required level for the newly created SNCP protection. The ODUk SNCP protection and SW SNCP protection protect services of different cross-connect granularities, which are ODUk and GE/ ANY respectively. If the protection type is changed, the relevant parameters must also be changed accordingly.
Default: SW SNCP
NOTE OptiX OSN 1800 series support SW SNCP protection type only.
Service Type
For example: GE
Sets the service type of the SNCP.
SNCP Type
SNC/I, SNC/S, SNC/N
The SNCP Type parameter specifies the monitoring mode of the ODUk SNCP protection.
Default: SNC/I
NOTE When you select Protection Type as ODUK SNCP, you can set this parameter.
OTN Level
l When SNCP Type is set to SNC/I, this parameter is invalid l When SNCP Type is set to SNC/N: PM, TCM1, TCM2, TCM3, TCM4, TCM5, TCM6. Default: PM
Sets the OTN level. NOTE When you select SNCP Type is SNC/N or SNC/S, you can set this parameter.
l When SNCP Type is set to SNC/S: TCM1, TCM2, TCM3, TCM4, TCM5, TCM6. Default: TCM1
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-13
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
D Parameter Reference
Field
Value
Description
Current Status
Normal State, WTR State, Manual (from Protection to Working) Switching State, Manual (from Working to Protection) Switching State, Forced (from Protection to Working) Switching State, Forced (from Working to Protection) Switching State, SD Switching, SF Switching, Lockout
The Current Status parameter displays the switching status of a protection group.
Default: None Revertive Mode
Revertive, Non-Revertive Default: Non-Revertive
WTR Time (s)
300-720 Default: 600
Working Channel Hold-Off Time
D-14
0-100 Default: 0
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The Revertive Mode parameter provides users with an option for whether to switch back the services to the working channel from the protection channel automatically after the working channel is recovered. The WTR time (s) parameter indicates the waiting time before the services in the protection group switch back to the working channel if the working channel is recovered when the protection group works in the revertive mode. The Working Channel Hold-Off Time (100ms) parameter specifies the time period from the time that the system detects the switching condition in the working channel to the time that the switching is performed. This is to prevent protection switching from being performed repeatedly when the service state is unstable.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
D Parameter Reference
Field
Value
Description
Protection Channel Hold-Off Time
0-100
The Protection Channel Hold-Off Time (100ms) parameter specifies the time period from the time that the system detects the switching condition in the protection channel to the time that the switching is performed.
SD Enable Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: 0
Sets the SD enabling status.
Default: Disabled Channel Status
Normal, SF, SD, Unknown
Displays the status of the working service or the protection service in a protection group.
Current Channel
Working Channel, Protection Channel, Delay Start
The Current Channel parameter indicates the type of the channel where the service is currently located in the SNCP protection group.
Default: /
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-15
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
E
E Using the Commissioning Tool of the Access WDM OTN for Deployment On Site
Using the Commissioning Tool of the
Access WDM OTN for Deployment On Site
E.1 Connecting the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool Before logging in to the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool, perform a test to check whether the connection between the computer and the NE is established. This is to ensure that the data configuration and other commissioning operations can be performed successfully by using the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool. E.2 Logging in to the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool Users can log in to either the English version or the Chinese version of the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool by using the default user name and password. E.3 Checking the Self-Check Report of the Equipment Before the software commissioning is performed, check the ATN self-check report to determine and then rectify the faults in hardware and software. This improves the commissioning efficiency. E.4 Setting NE Attributes The NE attributes need to be set during the software deployment to ensure that the system can manage the NEs. E.5 Checking and Adjusting the Optical Power Users can query the running status and optical power of each optical interface of a board to check whether the optical power meets the communication requirement. In addition, users can adjust the optical power by increasing or decreasing the attenuation of the attenuator attached to the optical interface. E.6 Configuring ECC The ECC is used to realize delivery of ECC packets through the Ethernet port on the SCC. This is to ensure the normal communication between NEs.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-1
E Using the Commissioning Tool of the Access WDM OTN for Deployment On Site
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
E.1 Connecting the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool Before logging in to the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool, perform a test to check whether the connection between the computer and the NE is established. This is to ensure that the data configuration and other commissioning operations can be performed successfully by using the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool.
Background Information If the IP address of the equipment cannot be obtained, press the LAMP button on the SCC board to restore the default IP address of the OptiX OSN 1800. Then, connect the equipment to the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool for commissioning. Method for restoring the default IP address: Press the LAMP button on the SCC board and hold it for five to ten seconds. Then, release the button and wait for five to ten seconds. Press the button again and hold it for five to ten seconds. Then, release the button and wait for five to ten seconds. Press the button for the third time and hold it for more than five seconds, and then release the button. In this manner, the IP address of the equipment can be restored. NOTE
The default IP address is 129.9.191.240.
Precautions
CAUTION In the case of direct connection, do not configure a gateway if you configure IP Address (I). Otherwise, any error in configuring the gateway may incur a connection failure. If the PC is equipped with multiple network adapters, adopt the local connection corresponding to the network adapter connected to the chassis. NOTE
You can connect the PC to the Optix OSN 1800 series in the following ways: l Direction connection l Connection through a LAN The following procedures for connecting the PC to the NE are based on the Windows XP operating system.
Procedure l
Direction connection 1.
E-2
Connect the network interface of the PC to the ETH1 or ETH2&OAM network interface on the front panel of the SCC housed in the Optix OSN 1800 series chassis. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
l
E Using the Commissioning Tool of the Access WDM OTN for Deployment On Site
2.
Click Start and choose Settings > Control Panel to display the Control Panel window.
3.
Double-click Network Connection to display the Network Connection window.
4.
Right-click Local Connection and select Properties to display the Local Connection Properties window.
5.
Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties to display the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.
6.
Select Use the following IP address. In the IP Address (I) field, enter an IP address in the same network section as that of the NE, such as 129.9.0.N. "N" ranges from 1 to 255, but must be different from that in the IP address of the NE. In the Subnet Mask field, enter 255.255.0.0.
7.
Click OK to finish the setting.
Connection through a LAN 1.
When you connect the PC to the NE through a LAN, set the IP address in the same way as you set it for the direction connection scenario.
2.
The IP address of the Optix OSN 1800 series must be in the same network section as that of the LAN.
3.
Connect the NE to a hub, router, or Ethernet switch through a network cable.
----End
E.2 Logging in to the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool Users can log in to either the English version or the Chinese version of the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool by using the default user name and password.
Prerequisite Call off the IE proxy. Set the internet security level of IE to low.
Precautions NOTE
l For the sake of security, the system automatically exits after a period of inactivity. To operate the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool, you need to log in again.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-3
E Using the Commissioning Tool of the Access WDM OTN for Deployment On Site
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Procedure Step 1 Start Internet Explorer. Step 2 In the address bar, enter the IP address of the OptiX OSN 1800 NE. For example, enter 129.9.0.9.
NOTE
By default, the login user interface language is English. You can click Chinese or English to choose a language after logging in the tool.
Step 3 Enter a valid user name and password. NOTE
user is "lct" and the password is "password".
Step 4 Press Enter or click Login. ----End
E.3 Checking the Self-Check Report of the Equipment Before the software commissioning is performed, check the ATN self-check report to determine and then rectify the faults in hardware and software. This improves the commissioning efficiency.
Procedure Step 1 Log in to the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool. Enter a valid user name and password. Then, the OTN Deployment Commissioning Tool automatically queries the power-on self-check report of the equipment that is stored in the Flash of the SCC board. NOTE
l After the equipment is powered on, the equipment itself checks the equipment type, basic information of the NEs, the position information of every board, and the connecting status between the Local Bus and the chip of the board. l In the slot assignment diagram, green indicates that the board is installed, and yellow indicates that the board is not installed.
Step 2 In the Tree View, choose Homepage and query the self-check result. The self-check result is displayed on the interface of the Web commissioning tool in lists.
E-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
E Using the Commissioning Tool of the Access WDM OTN for Deployment On Site
Step 3 Click Print to save the self-check result. Click Refresh to perform the operation again. ----End
E.4 Setting NE Attributes The NE attributes need to be set during the software deployment to ensure that the system can manage the NEs.
Procedure Step 1 In the Tree View, choose NE Commissioning > NE Attributes, the NE Attributes interface is displayed in the operation area.
Step 2 Click Refresh to view the basic attributes of the current NE. Step 3 Change the values of NE Name, NE IP, NE Submask, and NE Time(UTC) according to actual requirements. NOTE
The value of NE Name consists of a maximum of 64 characters.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-5
E Using the Commissioning Tool of the Access WDM OTN for Deployment On Site
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Step 4 Click Apply to activate the configuration. Then, a prompt information is displayed. NOTE
After modifying the IP, re-log the NE. If the IP subnet segment of the computer is not as same as the NE IP subnet segment, you should set a new IP address for the computer. Ensure that it is in the same IP subnet segment as the NE IP, then re-log the NE.
Step 5 Modify the NE ID. 1.
Click Modify ID.
2.
Input new ID in the Modify NEID dialog box and then click Apply. The value of the ID is in hexadecimal.
3.
Click Close to return to the login interface.
4.
Log in to the NE again.
----End
E.5 Checking and Adjusting the Optical Power Users can query the running status and optical power of each optical interface of a board to check whether the optical power meets the communication requirement. In addition, users can adjust the optical power by increasing or decreasing the attenuation of the attenuator attached to the optical interface.
Procedure Step 1 In the Tree View, chooseNE Commissioning > Optical power detecting, Select the detection object interface displayed in the operation area.
E-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
E Using the Commissioning Tool of the Access WDM OTN for Deployment On Site
NOTE
l The Power (dBm) parameter indicates the current optical power of the optical interface of the board. The Suggestion Range of Power(dBm) parameter indicates the the suggested optical power for the optical interface. l When specific values are displayed for Power (dBm) and Suggestion Range of Power(dBm), it indicates that the board is in service; if - is displayed, it indicates that the board is not installed.
Step 2 Select the optical interface of a board you want to set from the Select check box. NOTE
To select all boards or deselect all boards, click Select All or Unselect All.
Step 3 ClickAdd Board or Delete Board to add or delete a logical board. NOTE
This step is only applicable to optical power detection, and the physical board to be added must have optical interfaces.
Step 4 Click Start detecting and the optical power detection is performed on the selected board. After the optical power of a certain interface is queried out, the value is compared with the threshold. If the optical power is within Suggestion Range of Power(dBm), The Abnormity Type of Optical Power and Handling Suggestions and Measures columns list the details. Step 5 Clickprint to print out the detection result. The maintenance engineer adjusts the optical power according to the detection result. ----End
E.6 Configuring ECC The ECC is used to realize delivery of ECC packets through the Ethernet port on the SCC. This is to ensure the normal communication between NEs.
Procedure Step 1 In the Tree View, choose ECC Configure, the ECC Configure interface is displayed in the operation area. NOTE
The default tab for Extend Mode of ECC is Auto Configure.
Step 2 Choose Auto Configure, Manual Configure of Client, or Manual Configure of Server to set the ECC parameters according to the actual situation. The detailed procedure is as follows: 1.
When Extend Mode of ECC is set to Auto Configure, you can set Auto Configure Switch, which defaults to open. ClickApply to finish the configuration or clickQuery to display the current configuration.
2.
When Extend Mode of ECC is set to Manual Configure of Client, IP and Port can be set. The IP and port of the client must be consistent with the NE IP and port of the server.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-7
E Using the Commissioning Tool of the Access WDM OTN for Deployment On Site
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
ClickApply to finish the configuration, clickQuery to display the current configuration, or click delete to delete the configuration.
3.
When Extend Mode of ECC is set to Manual Configure of Server, IP cannot be modified. Only Port can be set.
NOTE
l Auto Configure conflicts with Manual Configure of Client and Manual Configure of Server. If you select Manual Configure of Client or Manual Configure of Server, make sure that Auto Configure is set to Close. l Auto Configure is applicable to the network that consists of a maximum of eight NEs. In the auto mode, the ECC is configured automaticallyManual Configure of Client and Manual Configure of Server are applicable to the network that consists of more than eight NEs. In the manual mode, the ECC needs to be configured manually.
Step 3 When the configuration of the ECC parameters takes effect, List of ECC Link Layer Management lists the specific information for the current state.
----End
E-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
F Glossary
F
Glossary
A Alarm
A visible or an audible indication to notify the person concerned that a failure or an emergency has occurred. See also Event.
APD
Avalanche Photodiode. A semiconductor photo detector with integral detection and amplification stages. Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages than other semiconductor electronics.
Attenuation
Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels.
Attenuator
A passive component that attenuates an electrical or optical signal.
B Back up
A method to copy the important data into a backing storage in case that the original is damaged or corrupted.
C
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Cabling ladder
The ladder between the cabinet and the cabling rack, which is used for cable routing.
Cabling
The methods to route the cables or fibers.
Channel
The smallest subdivision of a circuit that provides a type of communication service; usually a path with only one direction.
Client
A kind of terminal (PC or workstation) connected to a network that can send instructions to a server and get results through a user interface. See also server.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
F-1
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
F Glossary
Configuration data
The data that configures the NE hardware for coordination between this NE and other NEs in the entire network, and for operation of specified services. Configuration data is the instruction file of NEs, and it is a key element to ensure that the network runs efficiently. The typical configuration data includes board configuration, clock configuration and protection relationship.
Connection
A "transport entity" which consists of an associated pair of "unidirectional connections" capable of simultaneously transferring information in opposite directions between their respective inputs and outputs.
CWDM
Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing. The technology for transmitting signals at multiple wavelengths through the same fiber with wide spacing between optical channels. Typical spacing is several nanometers or more.
D Drop
The port on a network element where the service to an end customer may be connected, e.g., a tributary card on a SONET ADM. For example, a drop for a DS1 customer service may be provided by a VT1.5 card terminating a VT1.5 trail.
DWDM
Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing. The technology utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber.
E Ethernet
A data link level protocol comprising the OSI model's bottom two layers. It is a broadcast networking technology that can use several different physical media, including twisted pair cable and coaxial cable. Ethernet usually uses CSMA/CD. TCP/IP is commonly used with Ethernet networks.
F
F-2
Fault
A fault is the inability of a function to perform a required action. This does not include an inability due to preventive maintenance, lack of external resources, or planned actions.
Fiber connector
A device mounted on the end of a fiber-optic cable, light source, receiver, or housing that mates to a similar device to couple light into and out of optical fibers. A connector joins two fiber ends, or one fiber end and a light source or detector.
Fiber jumper
The fiber which is used to connect the subrack with the ODF.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
F Glossary
H Hardware loopback
A method to use a fiber to connect the receiving optical interface with the transmitting one on a board. It performs transmission tests, which method usually does not require the assistance of personnel at the served terminal.
L Label
A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
Laser
The device that generates the directional light covering a narrow range of wavelengths. Laser light is more coherent than ordinary light. Semiconductor diode lasers are the used light source in fiber-optic system.
Link
A "topological component" that provides transport capacity between two endpoints in different subnetworks via a fixed (i.e., inflexible routing) relationship. The endpoints are "subnetwork termination point pools" for SONET, and link termination points for ATM. Multiple links may exist between a pair of subnetworks. A link also represents a set of "link connections".
Loopback
The fault of each path on the optical fibre can be located by setting loopback for each path of the line. There are three kinds of loopback modes: No loopback, Outloop, Inloop.
M Multiplexer
An equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels being fixed.
N NE database
The database that is saved in the SCC board. There are three types of databases on the SCC board as follows: (1) DRDB: a dynamic database in a dynamic RAM, powered by battery; (2) SDB: a static database in a power-down RAM; (3) FDB0, FDB1: permanently saved databases in a Flash ROM. In efficient operation, the NE configuration data is saved in DRDB and SDB at the same time. Backing up an NE database means backing up the NE configuration data from SDB to FDB0 and FDB1.
Network segment
The range of IP addresses in which the gateway NE will operate.
O OADM
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer. A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
F-3
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
F Glossary
ODF
Optical Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
ONE
Optical Network Element. A stand-alone physical entity in an optical transmission network that supports at least network element functions.
Optical interface
A device to allow two or more corresponding optical transmitting units to be connected.
Optical spectrum analyzer
An instrument that scans the spectrum to record power, measures the value of loss insertion and tests the performance of the wavelength and optical signal noise ratio (OSNR) of each channel.
OSC
Optical Supervisory Channel. A technology realizes communication among nodes in optical transmission network and transmits the monitoring data in a certain channel (the wavelength of the working channel for it is 1510 nm and that of the corresponding protection one is 1625 nm).
OSNR
Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio. Ratio of the optical power of the transmitted optical signal to the noise on the received signal.
OTM
Optical Terminal Multiplexer. A device that multiplex or demultiplex optical signals into a transmission link or into the client side.
OTU
Optical Transponder Unit. A device that access service signals compliant with standards at the client side and convert them into standard DWDM or CWDM wavelengths.
Output optical power
The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
P
F-4
Pane
A major separate area of a window or dialog box, usually used for display rather than data entry.
Path
A logical connection between the point at which a standard frame format for the signal at the given rate is assembled, and the point at which the standard frame format for the signal is disassembled.
PIN
Photodiode. A semiconductor detector with an intrinsic (i) region separating the p- and n-doped regions. It has fast linear response and is used in fiber-optic receivers.
Pointer
An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to the frame reference of the transport entity on which it is supported.
Power box
A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet.
Procedure
A generic term for an action.
Process
A generic term for a collection of actions.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
F Glossary
R Receiver overload
Receiver overload is the maximum acceptable value of the received average power at point R.
Receiver sensitivity
Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R.
S SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A hierarchical set of digital transport structures, standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloads over physical transmission networks.
SONET
Synchronous Optical Network. A North American standard for Synchronous Data Transfer over Optical Networks.
Service protection
The measures to make sure the service transmitting not to be damaged or corrupted.
Side panel
The panel on the side of the cabinet.
Support
The frame on the bottom of a cabinet, when installing the cabinet on the antistatic floor.
V VLAN
Virtual local area network. A subset of the active topology of a Bridged Local Area Network. Associated with each VLAN is a VLAN Identifier (VID).
W
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
Washer
A washer which is used to level the cabinet.
WDM
Wavelength-Division Multiplexing. WDM technology utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber.
WTR
Wait to Restore. This command is issued when working channels meet the restoral threshold after an SD or SF condition. It is used to maintain the state during the WTR period unless it is pre-empted by a higher priority bridge request.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
F-5
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
G
G Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronyms and Abbreviations
A APD
Avalanche Photo Diode
D DWDM
Dense Wave Division Multiplexer
F FEC
Forward error correction
FOADM
Fixed Optical add/drop Multiplexer
I IC
Integrated Circuit
ID
Identity
IP
Internet Protocol
L LAN
Local Area Network
LCT
Local Craft Terminal
N
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
NE
Network Element
NM
Network Management
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
G-1
OptiX OSN 1800 Commissioning and Configuration Guide
G Acronyms and Abbreviations
O OADM
Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
OAM
Operation Administration and Maintenance
ODF
Optical Distribution Frame
ODUk
Optical Channel Data Unit-k
OSC
Optical Supervisory Channel
OSN
Optical Switch Node
OSNR
Optical Signal-to-noise Ratio
OTN
Optical Transmission Network
OTM
Optical Transport Module
OTU
Optical Transponder Unit
P PGND
Protection Ground
PIN
Positive Intrinsic Negative
S SCC
System Control & Communication
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SNCP
Subnetwork Connection Protection
V VLAN
Virtual Local Area Network
W WDM
G-2
Wavelength Division Multiplex
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-09-30)
